You are on page 1of 404

TOOLBOOK CATALOG OBJECTS

FULLY EXPLAINED

for

TOOLBOOK 8.5

Written By Denny Dedmore in February of 2003 - PDF VERSION


INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 7
MY BACKGROUND ............................................................................................................................. 7
VARIOUS THOUGHTS .......................................................................................................................... 8
Target Audience ............................................................................................................................ 8
Syntax Error .................................................................................................................................. 8
Don’t Quit Your Day Job .............................................................................................................. 8
Technical Support ......................................................................................................................... 8
Other Books................................................................................................................................... 8
CATALOG BASICS ........................................................................................................................... 9
CATALOG ........................................................................................................................................... 9
Showing the Catalog ..................................................................................................................... 9
Closing the Catalog....................................................................................................................... 9
Minimizing the Catalog............................................................................................................... 10
Un-Minimizing the Catalog......................................................................................................... 10
Undocking the Catalog................................................................................................................ 11
Docking the Catalog.................................................................................................................... 11
Resizing the Catalog.................................................................................................................... 11
CATEGORIES..................................................................................................................................... 12
ToolTips....................................................................................................................................... 12
Showing/Hiding Categories ........................................................................................................ 13
CATALOG OBJECTS .......................................................................................................................... 14
ToolTips....................................................................................................................................... 14
Showing/Hiding Objects.............................................................................................................. 15
Adding New Objects .................................................................................................................... 15
CATALOG OBJECT DETAILS ..................................................................................................... 17
BONUS - FREE CATEGORIES ............................................................................................................. 19
Bullets.......................................................................................................................................... 19
LIBRARY.TBK ............................................................................................................................. 20
Progress Bars.............................................................................................................................. 21
Question Images.......................................................................................................................... 22
Scrapbook.................................................................................................................................... 23
ACTION OBJECTS.............................................................................................................................. 25
Simulation.................................................................................................................................... 26
Action Trigger ............................................................................................................................. 36
Reset Trigger ............................................................................................................................... 38
Delay ........................................................................................................................................... 40
Action Timer................................................................................................................................ 41
Choose Browser .......................................................................................................................... 45
Exit .............................................................................................................................................. 46
Exit with Confirmation ................................................................................................................ 47
Run Application........................................................................................................................... 48
Open Document........................................................................................................................... 49
Play Audio with Bullets 1 & 2..................................................................................................... 50
Bullet Text Level 1 (1)(2)(3) and Level 2 (1)(2)(3) ..................................................................... 51
ASPEN CDS - LXS........................................................................................................................... 55
Add A Link................................................................................................................................... 56

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 1


Add A Note .................................................................................................................................. 57
Ask An Expert .............................................................................................................................. 58
Exit .............................................................................................................................................. 59
Home ........................................................................................................................................... 60
View Glossary ............................................................................................................................. 61
View Help .................................................................................................................................... 62
View Personal Feedback............................................................................................................. 63
BUTTONS .......................................................................................................................................... 65
Pushbutton................................................................................................................................... 66
Command .................................................................................................................................... 67
Shadow ........................................................................................................................................ 68
Rounded....................................................................................................................................... 69
Rectangle..................................................................................................................................... 70
Checkbox 3D ............................................................................................................................... 71
Radio Button................................................................................................................................ 72
Checkbox ..................................................................................................................................... 73
Radio Button 3D.......................................................................................................................... 74
Label............................................................................................................................................ 75
DRAW OBJECTS ................................................................................................................................ 77
Triangle ....................................................................................................................................... 78
Square.......................................................................................................................................... 79
Pentagon...................................................................................................................................... 80
Hexagon ...................................................................................................................................... 81
Octagon ....................................................................................................................................... 82
Freeform Polygon ....................................................................................................................... 83
Circle........................................................................................................................................... 84
Ellipse.......................................................................................................................................... 85
Rectangle..................................................................................................................................... 86
Rounded Rectangle...................................................................................................................... 87
Freeform Angled Line ................................................................................................................. 88
Simple Curve ............................................................................................................................... 89
Arc ............................................................................................................................................... 90
Pie................................................................................................................................................ 91
Line.............................................................................................................................................. 92
Angled Line ................................................................................................................................. 93
Complex Curve............................................................................................................................ 94
MEDIA (ANIMATED)......................................................................................................................... 95
Animated Helicopter ................................................................................................................... 96
Animated Top .............................................................................................................................. 97
Animated Globe........................................................................................................................... 98
Animated Gears........................................................................................................................... 99
Animated Clock ......................................................................................................................... 100
MEDIA (BACKDROPS)..................................................................................................................... 101
All Backdrops ............................................................................................................................ 102
MEDIA (CLIP ART) ......................................................................................................................... 103
All Clip Art ................................................................................................................................ 105
MEDIA (ICONS) .............................................................................................................................. 107
All Icons..................................................................................................................................... 108
MEDIA (TILED BACKDROPS) .......................................................................................................... 109

2
All Backdrops ............................................................................................................................ 110
MEDIA PLAYERS ............................................................................................................................ 111
Universal Media Player ............................................................................................................ 112
Popup Media Player.................................................................................................................. 116
Flash Media Player................................................................................................................... 118
Popup Flash Player................................................................................................................... 119
Correct Feedback...................................................................................................................... 120
Incorrect Feedback ................................................................................................................... 121
Streaming RealPlayer ............................................................................................................... 122
Streaming MPlayer ................................................................................................................... 123
Video Player 1, 2, 3................................................................................................................... 124
Popup Video 160x120, 240x180, 320x240................................................................................ 126
Video-Text Synchronizer ........................................................................................................... 128
Play Media Player..................................................................................................................... 130
Pause Media Player .................................................................................................................. 131
Stop Media Player..................................................................................................................... 132
Stop All Media........................................................................................................................... 133
Streaming Popup-Player ........................................................................................................... 134
Video Stage................................................................................................................................ 135
Hotword 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.............................................................................................................. 136
Icon 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6..................................................................................................................... 138
NAVIGATION OBJECTS ................................................................................................................... 139
Hotspots Graphic ...................................................................................................................... 140
Popup Index............................................................................................................................... 142
Automatic Menu ........................................................................................................................ 143
Kiosk Page Turner .................................................................................................................... 144
Glossary 1, 2, 3, 4 ..................................................................................................................... 145
Jump To URL 1, 2 ..................................................................................................................... 146
Navigation with Display............................................................................................................ 147
Get ToolBook Neuron 1, 2......................................................................................................... 148
Get Flash ................................................................................................................................... 149
Get Media Player ...................................................................................................................... 150
Get RealPlayer .......................................................................................................................... 151
Get PowerPoint ......................................................................................................................... 152
First/Last/Next/Previous Page, Back ........................................................................................ 153
Navigation Panel 1 - 43 ............................................................................................................ 154
PAGES ............................................................................................................................................ 155
All Pages ................................................................................................................................... 156
PLACEHOLDER OBJECTS ................................................................................................................. 157
Animated GIF............................................................................................................................ 158
Auto-Update Web Graphic........................................................................................................ 159
Auto-Update Web Field............................................................................................................. 160
External URL Graphic .............................................................................................................. 161
File ............................................................................................................................................ 162
Java ........................................................................................................................................... 163
Neuron....................................................................................................................................... 164
PowerPoint 95........................................................................................................................... 166
PowerPoint 97+ ........................................................................................................................ 167
Reusable Graphic...................................................................................................................... 168

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 3


Web Graphic ............................................................................................................................. 170
Web Page................................................................................................................................... 171
QUESTIONS (MULTIPLE CHOICE).................................................................................................... 173
Multiple Choice 1 - 66............................................................................................................... 174
Definable Multiple..................................................................................................................... 184
Multiple Choice ......................................................................................................................... 193
Multiple Choice Fields .............................................................................................................. 203
QUESTIONS (TRUE-FALSE) ............................................................................................................. 215
True-False 1 - 52....................................................................................................................... 216
QUESTIONS (VARIOUS)................................................................................................................... 225
Definable Arrange 1, 2.............................................................................................................. 226
Definable Drop.......................................................................................................................... 236
Definable Match........................................................................................................................ 246
Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4................................................................................................................ 255
Drag Text................................................................................................................................... 264
Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4................................................................................................................ 271
Fill In The Blank 1, 2 ................................................................................................................ 281
Fill In The Blank Hotword ........................................................................................................ 291
Match Item 1.............................................................................................................................. 301
Match Item 2.............................................................................................................................. 310
Order Text ................................................................................................................................. 319
Rating 1, 2, 3 ............................................................................................................................. 326
Select Text ................................................................................................................................. 336
Slider 1, 2, 3, 4 .......................................................................................................................... 345
Slider Position ........................................................................................................................... 354
SCORING AND TRACKING ............................................................................................................... 355
Show Delayed............................................................................................................................ 356
Reset Lesson .............................................................................................................................. 359
Reset Page ................................................................................................................................. 360
Restart Lesson ........................................................................................................................... 361
Score This Quiz ......................................................................................................................... 362
Score This Page......................................................................................................................... 364
Show Score ................................................................................................................................ 366
Exit (Mark As Complete)........................................................................................................... 368
Exit (Suspend Lesson) ............................................................................................................... 369
Exit (Discard Results) ............................................................................................................... 370
Feedback Field.......................................................................................................................... 371
Score Field ................................................................................................................................ 372
Graphic Timer 1, 2, 3, 4 ............................................................................................................ 373
Digital Timer 1, 2 ...................................................................................................................... 375
TEXT FIELDS .................................................................................................................................. 377
Auto-Sizing Field....................................................................................................................... 378
Borderless.................................................................................................................................. 379
Call-out Bubble ......................................................................................................................... 380
Call-out Text.............................................................................................................................. 382
Card........................................................................................................................................... 383
Combo Box ................................................................................................................................ 384
Date Field.................................................................................................................................. 386
Display Page Number ............................................................................................................... 387

4
Graphic List............................................................................................................................... 388
Inset ........................................................................................................................................... 390
Marquee .................................................................................................................................... 391
Multi-Select List Box ................................................................................................................. 392
Ordered List .............................................................................................................................. 394
Password ................................................................................................................................... 395
Raised ........................................................................................................................................ 396
Rectangle................................................................................................................................... 397
Scrolling .................................................................................................................................... 398
Shadow Text 1, 2 ....................................................................................................................... 399
Shadowed .................................................................................................................................. 400
Single-Select List Box................................................................................................................ 401
Time Field ................................................................................................................................. 402
Unordered List .......................................................................................................................... 403

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 5


6
W HO AM I AND W HY AM I
INTRODUCTION QUALIFIED TO W RITE A BOOK
ABOUT TOOLBOOK?

My Background
My name is Denny Dedmore and I work for Click2learn. My company involvement with ToolBook can be
summarized as follows.
• In May of 1996 I was hired by Click2learn (then known as Asymetrix) as a Technical Support
representative. I had never used ToolBook before that time.
• I spent the next three years answering phone calls and emails about ToolBook (as well as Librarian,
Web 3D, 3D F/X, Compel, Digital Video Producer and Web Publisher).
• In June of 1999 I became the Manager of Technical Support, and worked in that capacity for the next
year.
• In June of 2000 I was offered a position in the Engineering department working as an OpenScript
programmer on ToolBook 8 and 8.5.
• In June of 2002 I transferred back over to Technical Support.
• I have attended all of the Platte Canyon TBCON conferences, offering presentations on a variety of
topics.

My involvement with ToolBook also extends outside of the Click2learn company arena.
• I have been active on the ToolBook Listserv for the last five years.
• In 1997 I started up my own web site called www.toolbookthings.com. Using ToolBook 5 (and later 6.5) as
my HTML editor of choice I created a place where users like yourselves could go to learn cool tips
and tricks, download free snippets of OpenScript code and troubleshoot why your HTML export was
not working. Although my site is no longer around, its three years of existence served the purpose of
forcing me to use ToolBook as an HTML authoring tool. It also allowed me to use the site to show you
all the pitfalls I ran into and how I got around them. When I closed the site down, I transferred all of
the useful tips and snippets of code into the Technical Support knowledgebase where you can still
access them today.
• In March of 1998 I started working on a replacement for the Full Text Search feature that was
removed from version 6 of ToolBook. It took many months to complete, and in the end I created FTS
Pro, an add-on utility for ToolBook. Platte Canyon is now the exclusive reseller of FTS Pro. If you
have not heard of Platte Canyon ñ you have no idea what you are missing. They make a variety of
plug-ins for ToolBook ñ visit them at www.plattecanyon.com.
• In June of 2002, I introduced a new web site called www.toolbookhelp.com. It is a place where I can
sell my books as well as provide a resource of free information about ToolBook to the ToolBook user
community.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 7


VARIOUS THOUGHTS THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW

Since I have written this book, that means I must be a writer in addition to a programmer, correct? Not at all. I find that I
can write in a way that people can easily understand, but in the process I’m sure I end up breaking every grammar rule
ever written. I will do my best to ensure that there are no misspelled words and that the material makes sense, but I must
write the way I write.

Target Audience
This book is intended for any ToolBook Assistant or ToolBook Instructor 8.5 users. It does not matter if you are a novice
or have been using ToolBook for years, there is something in this book for everyone. If you are using ToolBook 8.0 or
8.1, much of this information also applies to you, however the book is written with 8.5 in mind.

Syntax Error
The material that I present in this book is true and correct to the best of my knowledge but as no programmer or user of
ToolBook can know everything [even if we tend to all claim that we do], it is possible that I may improperly or
incompletely represent some information. I invite you to contact me directly if you feel that I have done this.

Don’t Quit Your Day Job


Yes, I work for Click2learn by day and write books by night. Well, at least a few books. Click2learn is aware of my
books, and has granted me permission to write them [on my own time] so that I can provide the ToolBook community
with some much needed reference materials. All information in this book are my thoughts and should not in any way be
interpreted as the official thoughts or opinions of Click2learn, Inc.

Technical Support
Since this book is written by me and not Click2learn, all material presented in this book are my thoughts and all coding
samples provided in this book are my samples. Please do not contact Click2learn Technical Support with questions about
this book. They are not in any way responsible for the content. If you have questions about the content of this book
please direct them to me.

Other Books
I have various ideas for ToolBook topics which could be written about. Writing one large book to encompass all of these
ideas would take a considerable amount of time, and probably be more information than most of you want to read.
Therefore I have considered making smaller books that focus on specific topics. If you have ideas for one of these
‘focus’ books, please let me know.
At this time the only other book I have in print is the OpenScript & Actions Editor Programming Reference Guide,
available for order on my web site: http://www.toolbookhelp.com.

8
W E ALL HAVE TO START AT THE
CATALOG BASICS BEGINNING

Catalog
Anyone that has used ToolBook before, even just once, will likely know what the Catalog is. It is the place where you
find all of the interactive objects that you can add to your project...things like question objects and media players. In fact
there are several hundred objects in the catalog for you to use.
For ToolBook Assistant users, using the Catalog is pretty much the only way to get objects into your project. ToolBook
Instructor users have the option of also using the Tool Palette to draw certain objects onto their pages. Objects such as
buttons and fields.

Showing the Catalog


When you are working in ToolBook it is very possible that the Catalog will not be visible. It is necessary to show/open
the Catalog in order to add new objects to your book from the Catalog.
You can show the Catalog by using one of the following methods while at Author level.
• Pressing F2 on your keyboard
• Clicking on the Catalog icon on your Tool Bar
• Choosing Catalog from your View menu

Closing the Catalog


When you are done using the Catalog you can choose to close it. Closing the Catalog can free up space on your screen,
and get it out of the way for a while until you need it again.
You can close the Catalog by using one of the following methods while at Author level.
• Pressing F2 on your keyboard
• Clicking on the Catalog icon on your Tool Bar
• Choosing Catalog from your View Menu
• Clicking the in the corner of the Catalog window

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 9


Minimizing the Catalog
When you are done using the Catalog you can also choose to minimize it, freeing up space on your screen. The
difference between closing the Catalog and minimizing it is primarily associated with the amount of time it requires
ToolBook to open the Catalog. As you are probably aware, the Catalog is not something that opens in a snap. Even on
my fastest machine, it seems to take the Catalog at least 7 seconds to open.
Using the Minimize feature will result in the Catalog reducing itself to be 0 pixels wide, making it appear to be closed -
but in fact it is still open. When you restore the size of the Catalog (un-minimize it), it will appear in a snap because the
size of the window is simply restored back to its normal size - a process that does not involve re-opening the Catalog.
To minimize the catalog you will need to click on the minimize button located on the edge of the Catalog window. Note
that this is only available when the Catalog is in a Docked position. If the catalog is not Docked, your only option is to
close the Catalog.

Un-Minimizing the Catalog


If your Catalog is minimized and you want to use it again, all you need to do is click on the restore button located on the
edge of the Catalog window. When the Catalog restores itself, it will be at the same size as it was before you minimized
it.

10 Catalog Basics
Undocking the Catalog
The normal position for the Catalog is anchored on the left or right edge of the ToolBook window. You can choose to
undock the Catalog, allowing it to be a free floating window that you can move around on your screen.
To undock the Catalog you can do one of the following:
• Double-Click on the little caption bar at the top of the catalog
• Click and Drag on the little caption bar at the top of the catalog.
• Right-click on the little caption bar on the top of the catalog and choose floating from the Position option in the
right-click menu.

Docking the Catalog


If your catalog is not current in a Left Docked or Right Docked position, you return it to a docked position by doing one
of the following:
• Double-Click on the little caption bar at the top of the floating catalog. This will result in the catalog returning
to the last known docked position.
• Click and Drag the catalog back to the left or right edge of your ToolBook window until it snaps into a docked
position. This is not the easiest thing to do until you get used to how this works.
• Right-click on the little caption bar on the top of the catalog and choose one of the Docked options from the
Position option in the right-click menu.

Resizing the Catalog


When the catalog is in a Docked position, you don't really have any control over the height of the Catalog but you do
have control over the width. To change the width of the catalog simply click and drag on the edge of the catalog window.
As you drag, the catalog will get wider or narrower depending on how far you drag.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 11


When the Catalog is in a Floating position, you can control the height and width simply by click-dragging any of the
edges of the catalog window. The catalog will always snap to the nearest best-fit size.

Categories
If all the objects in the catalog were just tossed in one general area, it would be very difficult to locate the catalog object
you need. For this reason the catalog is broken up into various categories. The catalog will only show you what is in one
category at a time. To see what objects are in a different category, all you need to do is click on the category name and
that category will slide open.
If you check what is in the My Objects category you will find that it is empty be default. This is a category for you to put
your own objects into.

ToolTips
When you hover your mouse over a category name a tooltip will be displayed to tell you what the purpose of the
category is.

12 Catalog Basics
Showing/Hiding Categories
When you open ToolBook for the first time, you will notice that 13 categories are available. This however is not all of
the categories that you have access to. The rest are hidden so as to not clutter up your precious screen space. You have
the ability to hide or show any category, allowing you to customize it to the way you like.

To show or hide a category you will need to access the Customize Catalog dialog. To do this all you need to do is:
1. Right-click on the caption bar of the catalog (or any category name) to reveal the right-click menu
2. Click on the option to Customize

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 13


The Customize Catalog dialog shows a list of Categories and only those with a checkmark next to the Category Name
will appear in the catalog. If you scroll though this list and check everything, your catalog may become a bit crowded but
you will have access to all catalog objects.
You will find that there are many Media categories that are hidden by default, as well as a Pages category which contains
lots of page templates.

Catalog Objects
Each catalog category contains a number of catalog objects. These objects can be as simple as a standard field or button,
or as complex as a fully functional Question object.

ToolTips
When you hover your mouse over a catalog object, a tooltip will be displayed to tell you what the purpose of the object
is.

14 Catalog Basics
Showing/Hiding Objects
Certain objects in the catalog are only intended to be used for DHTML deployment, and others are intended for Native
ToolBook (which includes Neuron) deployment, and still others are intended to be used in either mode.
The catalog will automatically show the objects in the catalog that are appropriate for the deployment mode your book is
configured for, as well as hide the objects which are not appropriate.
You can see how an object in the catalog is configured by doing the following:
1. Right-clicking the catalog object to reveal the right-click menu
2. Choose the Properties for Icon option.
It is not at all recommended that you modify this setting for the standard catalog objects. You can however configure this
setting for your own objects when you add them to the catalog.

Adding New Objects


If you have an object in your book that you want to put into the Catalog, you can do so by doing the following:
1. Select the object.
2. Right-click on any Catalog category to reveal the right-click menu.
3. Choose the Add Selected Object To Catalog option.
If this option is grayed out, it is likely you have selected more than one object.
4. The New Object dialog will open allowing you to configure some data for this new object.
5. Once you press OK the object will be added to the specific category.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 15


16 Catalog Basics
Exactly What Do Those Catalog
CATALOG OBJECT DETAILS Objects Do?

The order that the catalog objects are defined in the sections that follow is based on the order that they appear in the
ToolBook catalog. Often times you will find the objects are listed in a alphabetical order and in other categories this is
not so.
Below you will see every category of the catalog that ships with ToolBook, all showing at once, including some extra
categories that are available from my web site for free.
Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install the free categories.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 17


18 Catalog Basics
Extra Catalog
BONUS - FREE CATEGORIES Categories

Bullets
Need some bullets for your project? Can't find anything decent to use? Then use my Bullets catalog category. It contains
114 bullet objects that you can drop into your application. They are available in a variety of colors, sizes and shapes.
Using Web 3D 2.0 (a product Click2learn used to make years ago) I created these new images in early October of 2002.
In order to use these new bullets, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import
this new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it on your page.
This works for both Assistant and Instructor.
Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 19


LIBRARY.TBK
For those of you that have used ToolBook forever, you may recall that versions of ToolBook way back when, such as
5.0, had a LIBRARY.TBK which contained lots of sample scripts and cool widgets not found elsewhere in the product.
Somewhere along the way, I think starting in version 6, this accessory file stopped shipping with ToolBook.
After several folks asking to see it revived, I decided to go through this Library file and see what could be moved into a
Catalog category. You will find the result of that work below as a new category that you can add to your ToolBook 8.x
authoring system. Note that most of the stuff in the old LIBRARY.TBK was sample code rather that widget objects. I
only ported over those which were widgets.
All of these objects work in Native ToolBook only, and will not function in DHTML. Because of this the category will
appear EMPTY if your book is currently configured for DHTML.
To use this new category, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this
new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it onto your page.
This works for both Assistant and Instructor, although most of the objects in this category will be useful only if you have
Instructor.
Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.

20 Bonus - Free Categories


Progress Bars
Ever wished you had a progress bar to use in your ToolBook project? Something to show the user while you grind
through the processing of some data. An hour glass is normally useful for short delays but a longer delay is better served
by using a progress bar.
I created this Progress Bar Widget several years back and even made a small enhancement recently in preparation for
putting it on my web site for all of you to use. It is driven entirely by OpenScript so you will not be able to get this
working in a DHTML exported project.
The download for this widget includes a sample book explaining what it is and how to use it, along with a .WBK file that
you can import as a new Progress Bar category in your Catalog.
In order to use these new Progress Bars, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to
import this new category into your catalog. Since operating the Progress Bar will require the use of OpenScript,
Assistant users will not be able to utilize this new widget.
Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 21


Question Images
Need a Multiple Choice (MC) or True/False (TF) question, but just can't bare to use the same old ones from the catalog?
Tired of the Purple Question Marks, the Blue Question Marks, the lack of color choices?
Using Web 3D 2.0 (a product Click2learn used to make years ago) I created about 100 new images for use with Question
Objects.
With the ability of ToolBook 8.x to import catalog categories, I decided to create a new category named Question
Images which will contain all the normal question images plus a bunch more that I created. All you need to do is use the
IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the
many images out of the category and drop it onto any TF or MC question object. This works for both Assistant and
Instructor.
NOTE: These new images look great on any light colored background but will produce a halo effect if you use it on a
darker background. There is no way to get around that problem, as the images were created to feather the outer most
pixels to white in order to produce a very crisp and clear image.
Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.

22 Bonus - Free Categories


Scrapbook
For those of you that have used ToolBook forever, you may recall that versions of ToolBook such as 5.0 had a
Scrapbook of images that shipped with ToolBook. It even had its own little catalog-like utility to let you pick an image
out of the scrapbook to add to your project.
Well, I have resurrected it....sort of. Actually, I have taken all of the images out of the old scrapbook and created a
Catalog category for you to add to your own catalog.
These images are not bitmaps but are actually created using ToolBook draw objects (such as lines, rectangles, polygons).
They will export to DHTML just fine and are fully resizable in ToolBook.
To use this new category, all you need to do is use the IMPORT button in the Customize Catalog dialog to import this
new category into your catalog, and then drag one of the many images out of the category and drop it onto your page.
This works for both Assistant and Instructor.
Visit www.toolbookhelp.com to download and install this free category.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 23


24 Bonus - Free Categories
ACTION OBJECTS Catalog Category

This category contains a variety of objects used for different purposes. The highlights would include the Simulation
object (available only in Instructor), and the Action Trigger/Reset objects which will be very valuable to Assistant users.
DHTML Mode View:

Native Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 25


Simulation
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
Using ToolBook, creating simulations of software is greatly simplified. Build the framework for an
entire simulation in a single location, the Properties for Simulation dialog box. You can define steps
in a simulation which include user interaction as trigger events. Respond to user input with different
levels of feedback for each step. Add built-in behavior or define custom behavior if you prefer.
Deliver your simulation in practice mode, assessment mode, or demonstration mode.

Note
Defining the complete functionality of the Simulation object could take up an entire book in itself, therefore I will not
attempt to fully describe this object - it is simply beyond the scope of this book. If you are looking for a book which will
more thoroughly cover the Simulation object, there is only one available. Tom Hall sells a book on his web site covering
the Actions Editor and Simulation object. You can find that book at http://www.tcc-pub.com.
Purpose
For those of you who have never used the Simulation object, let me quickly summarize what it does and does NOT do,
without trying to sound too confusing.
• It is NOT a screen capture utility to "watch" what you do in another application so that you can then have the
end-user interact with that captured session.
• This object is essentially a very intelligent Question Object. Yes, it is a question object complete with Scoring
functionality. In reality it deserves a category in the catalog by itself since it is such a complex component, but
it is tossed in with the Action Objects instead.
• The SIM object will permit you to build a simulation of another program (if you wish) where you can take
screen captures (which you capture and paste into ToolBook) and overlay onto those screen captures various
ToolBook objects which the user can interact with - such as and editable field, combobox, checkbox, etc.
• The SIM object will permit you to configure a series of actions the end-user is tasked to do, referred to as Steps.
• The SIM object will permit the execution of your own custom Actions Editor code at key points in the
simulations operation so that you can enhance the simulation experience.
• The SIM has a Demonstration mode which will let the user watch as the SIM accomplishes the Steps all by
itself, which is useful for a training mode.
• The SIM has a Practice mode where the user is told what needs to be done and the SIM analyzes what the user
did. It also provides feedback to the user about their success or failure at completing the tasks.
• The SIM has an Assessment mode where the user is in an actual testing mode, where they are given only one
chance to complete each task.
Details
This is the SIM object. Seems pretty harmless for the moment.

Rather than trying to explain what all the individual Tabs and Checkboxes are, in the Extended Properties dialog for the
SIM, let me walk you through the complete construction of a simulation I created. By doing this you will see all the
critical areas of the SIM configuration editor as well as experience the process of putting one together.
My sample will not cover all aspects of the SIM but will give you a general overall view of what it is and what you can
expect it to be able to do for you.

26 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Simulation

Example
My simulation is about how to use the SUM function, as well as how to BOLD text in a cell - using Microsoft Excel.
This is not a very complex simulation - I wanted to keep it simple for your first walk through.
This simulation consists of 3 separate tasks for the user to complete. The user will be provided feedback when they
answer incorrectly, and will be automatically taken to the next task if they answer correctly.
Below, you will see a screen capture of the finished ToolBook application. You will see that I have a Text Field across
the top of the screen, a screen capture from Excel on the page, as well as a sort of "feedback" section off to the right.

Components
Although the Example screen shot above does not look too intimidating, it is actually made up of objects you are not
even aware of. Seen below, I have spread all the objects out so that you can see each one of them, allowing you to clearly
see how many objects there are in this simulation.
As you can see, there were many things on the page that might not have been apparent:
• 4 Screen Shots
• A Next button as well as a Continue button
• The SIM object from the catalog
• Various fields which we will cover in detail
• Two shadow rectangles and 3 small rectangles which we will cover in detail.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 27


Simulation

Assembly Step 1
The first thing I did to start my simulation creation was to build my basic components. Below you will see each
component as well as Bubble Boxes explaining each element.

Assembly Step 2
The next step required acquiring actual screen shots from Excel. These are the 4 that I grabbed:
• The first one shows the initial state of the simulation.

• The next one shows what the screen looks like after the SUM button is pressed.

28 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Simulation

• The third one shows the user successfully moving the focus rectangle to cell D2.

• The last one shows the value in cell D2 becoming bold.

What the SIM is going to do, is permit me to show and hide these 4 images to make the user think they are interacting
with the spreadsheet.
These 4 images are pasted into ToolBook and stacked directly on top of each other, and the moved to an appropriate spot
on the ToolBook page.
Assembly Step 3
Lastly I added the Title text across the top of the page with a text field, and added a shadow effect under the screen shots
using a rectangle object. I also moved the SIM object somewhere out of the way.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 29


Simulation

Assembly Step 4
One last thing needs to be added before we can start configuring the SIM. The user is expected to click on 3 things
during this SIM. The SUM Toolbar button, the D2 cell and the Bold Toolbar button.
In order for me to detect a click we need
something to click on. That's were the 3
little rectangles come from which I revealed
in the Components section. In my example
the rectangles are visible (yellow actually),
so that you can see them in this book,
however you will not want the user to see
them, so the rectangles should really be
white and transparent with no border. These
need to be sized and positioned directly over
the areas on the screen shots that need to be
clicked on.
As you can see in this next image, I have put
the little rectangles over the correct areas of
the screen shots.

Before you configure the SIM


Before you start configuring all the settings of a SIM object it will be important to NAME all objects on your page which
the SIM will end up referring to.
For example I will never reference the Shadow objects so there is no need to name them, but the screen shot images need
names, and the clickable rectangles need names too.
Configuring the SIM
Select the SIM object and open the Extended Properties dialog to reveal the editor.
GENERAL TAB
• I have given my SIM a name.
• I have configured my SIM to reset when the page is entered.
• I have enabled the Auto Start feature
• I have disabled Scoring as I am not interested in giving a score
for this SIM
• All of the other enabled settings are default settings, and I left
them alone.

30 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Simulation

CONTROL OBJECTS TAB


• Remember I had named all of the objects and I had indicated
that I had already named my Feedback field, my Instructions
field and Continue button?
• If you too do this, then the first time you open the SIM editor
and go to this tab, the SIM will auto detect these objects and fill
in the names for you.
• If you don't name your objects, you will not see them listed
here nor can you choose them until you do name them.
• For the purposes of my simulation, I also chose to ensure that
the Continue button was disabled as needed.

ACTIONS TAB
• The Actions Tab permits you to set up some Actions Editor
logic which will execute at 3 possible times.
• In my case I needed to set up some Actions Editor code to hide
various objects on the page when the Simulation was reset.
• I also wanted to ensure the NEXT button was made visible
when the SIM was completed, so the user could leave the page.
• I also wanted the Instructions field to tell the user to click this
NEXT button to get off the page.

Action Sequence: This is the Actions Editor logic I added to control what happens when the Simulation had ended.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 31


Simulation

Action Sequence: This is the Actions Editor logic I added to control what happens when the Simulation is reset. This
logic was needed to ensure the screen shots were hidden (except the initial one) and that the Next button was hidden.

STEPS TAB
• A SIM can have one or more STEPs configured within it. A STEP
can be as simple as clicking on something, which is what I have
configured - or it can be as complex as requiring the user to type
several things on the page, and select various checkbox options.
• As you can see to the left, my 3 steps are listed.
• In order to create a step you just click Add...
• I will cover one of the steps below, but realize that all of the others
are configured nearly identical.

STEP 1 - General Tab


• I have named my Step with something meaningful so I can
differentiate it from the others I will be creating.
• I provided the instructions to the user to let them know what is
expected of them for this first step.
• I also have configured this so they get two chances to get it correct.

32 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Simulation

STEP 1 - Trigger Events


• Using the Add... button I have added a Correct trigger event. This
event tells the SIM that it can proceed to the next Step. This correct
trigger event is the act of clicking on the little rectangle I placed
over the top of the SUM button on the Excel Toolbar.
• I also wanted to let the user know when they clicked on the wrong
object. The easiest way to set that up was to use the option "Click
on any object".

STEP 1 - Feedback
• Since this STEP is configured to a allow 2 attempts I can choose to
configure the feedback text for an incorrect response. I can
configure what the user sees the first time and the second time they
get it incorrect.
• The user will see no feedback if they get the answer correct.
• For the Attempt 2, my feedback was configured to say " Sorry, you
are still incorrect, the Simulation will now continue to the next
task."

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 33


Simulation

STEP 1 - Actions
• On the Actions Tab for this Step, I wanted to ensure that when the
Step was over that the next screen shot and clickable little
rectangle, were shown so the user could see them.
• Note, because of the layer order that I put the screen shots in, I
didn't need to worry about hiding the first screen shot. The second
one ends up showing right on top of it.

Action Sequence: At the end of the Step, this Actions Editor code will ensure the next screen shot is visible.

34 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Simulation

YOUR SIMULATION NOTES:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 35


Action Trigger
DHTML or NATIVE
An action trigger initiates an event, such as making a hidden object visible when you click the
action trigger button at Reader level. You can use the action trigger to hide, show, animate, or
trigger any object on your page.

The Action Trigger object is typically used by a ToolBook Assistant user who is interested in setting up a series of
actions to occur on a page. ToolBook Instructor users can also use this object but will likely find that using the Actions
Editor is much more powerful and just as easy [if not easier] to set up.
Purpose
The purpose of the object is to permit you to set up a series of actions to occur - in sequence. The type of actions you can
perform is very limited, but you can do quite a bit with it. This object will permit you to do these four types of actions:
• Show an object
Makes the object become visible
• Hide and object
Makes the object become invisible
• Start a Path Animation
Initiates the start of a predefined Path Animation you have configured for an object
• Trigger an Object
Sends a ButtonClick to the object unless the object has a predefined behavior associated with the Trigger event.
Various catalog objects will respond to the Trigger event. For example a Media Player such as the Universal
Media Player will start playing if you Trigger it. A Delay button will start counting. Another Action Trigger can
be 'triggered' allowing you to chain together several separately configured action sequences.
As seen in the figure below, I have set up the following sequence to occur when the page is entered: Show a button,
Trigger a delay, Hide a button and Start a Path Animation.

Details
There is no preset limit to how many of these objects you can add to this list of Objects to Trigger. However if you add
too many it becomes a small nightmare to manage.
Notice that you have Up/Down arrows which will let you move an object to another position in the list of object, in the
event you change your mind about the order things should be processed.
You can click on the colored lettered block symbol in front of each object in your list to cycle through the four available
action types. For example, if I changed my mind and wanted to show Button "Pencil" rather than hide it, all I need to do
is click on the H symbol several times until it changes to a S symbol.

36 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Action Trigger

To add items to this list, click the Add... button. This will open the following dialog:

When you click on the combobox it will expand to show you all named object on your page or background. I say 'named'
because if you have not given your object a name, it will not show up in this list. So, make sure you name any object you
are going to be referencing with the Action Trigger object, and make sure you give your objects different names. Naming
them all XYZ may seem quick and easy but how can you tell the difference between them if you have 6 buttons named
XYZ? You can't - and neither can ToolBook.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 37


Reset Trigger
DHTML or NATIVE
A reset trigger causes an object to return to its initial state. For example, if clicking an action
trigger button hides a text field, you can use a reset trigger button to show the hidden field.

The Reset Trigger object is typically used by a ToolBook Assistant user who is interested in setting up a series of actions
to occur on a page. ToolBook Instructor users can also use this object but will likely find that using the Actions Editor is
much more powerful and just as easy [if not easier] to set up.
Purpose
The purpose of the object is to permit you to set up a series of actions to occur - in sequence, with the idea of resetting
some objects back to an initial state. The type of actions you can perform is very limited, but you can do quite a bit with
it. This object will permit you to do these four types of actions:
• Show an object
Makes the object become visible
• Hide and object
Makes the object become invisible
• Reset a Path Animation
Stops a Path Animation and returns object to its start position. As of Version 8.5 this is the only way to reset a
Path Animation. Even the Actions Editor is not able to reset a Path Animation.
• Trigger an Object
Sends a reset [ASYM_Reset] message to the object. Various catalog objects will respond to the reset message.
For example a Path Animation will reset, a Universal Media Player will stop and rewind, a question object will
reset to an unanswered state.
As seen in the figure below, I have set up the following sequence to occur when leaving the page or when switching
from Author to Reader level: Show a button, Hide a Button, Reset a Path Animation, Trigger a reset of a Universal
Media Player.

Details
There is no preset limit to how many of these objects you can add to this list of Objects to Reset. However if you add too
many it becomes a small nightmare to manage.
Notice that you have Up/Down arrows which will let you move an object to another position in the list of object, in the
event you change your mind about the order things should be processed.
You can click on the colored lettered block symbol in front of each object in your list to cycle through the four available
action types. For example, if I changed my mind and wanted to show Button "Pencil" rather than hide it, all I need to do
is click on the H symbol several times until it changes to a S symbol.

38 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Reset Trigger

To add items to this list, click the Add... button. This will open the following dialog:

When you click on the combobox it will expand to show you all named object on your page or background. I say 'named'
because if you have not given your object a name, it will not show up in this list. So, make sure you name any object you
are going to be referencing with the Reset Trigger object, and make sure you give your objects different names. Naming
them all XYZ may seem quick and easy but how can you tell the difference between them if you have 6 buttons named
XYZ? You can't - and neither can ToolBook.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 39


Delay
DHTML or NATIVE
A delay object adds a pause between two actions. For example, clicking an action trigger could hide an
object like a triangle, pause 3 seconds and then show the triangle. This sequence of actions is set up in
the Properties dialog box for an action trigger or reset trigger.

Purpose
The Delay catalog object is intended to be used in conjunction with the Action Trigger or Reset Trigger but can also be
used with the Actions Editor too - although not recommended. A delay in the Actions Editor can be better accomplished
using the Timed Delay action, rather than the Delay catalog object.
Details
The Delay catalog object can be configure to be from 0 to 65 seconds and although the editor does not indicate so, you
can also use non-whole number values such as 4.5 seconds, however you are limited to one decimal place. To enter a
value less than 1, type in your value in this format: 0.x

It is a good idea to rename your Delay object to something more meaningful such as "My 3 Second Delay" so that you
can differentiate it from other Delay objects you may decide to put on the page.
To use this object in conjunction with the Action or Reset Trigger, all you need to do is add the Delay object as one of
the "Objects To Trigger" in the editor for the Action or Reset Trigger. Make sure the type of action you specify for this
Delay object is 'trigger' - designated as a blue-T symbol as shown below.

Native | DHTML
This object behaves a little different in Native ToolBook as compared to when exported for DHTML. While this delay is
occurring in Native ToolBook, most interactive events you may have added to your page will be blocked [this is not true
for DHTML exported content]. For example any ToolTips or Rollover Graphic effects will not show until after the delay
has finished.
Only the following 3 things can occur during the delay in Native ToolBook:
1. A button click on a button will terminate the delay and permit ToolBook to process the button click.
2. A button click on a hotword will terminate the delay and permit ToolBook to process the button click.
3. Pressing Escape on your keyboard will terminate the delay.

40 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Action Timer
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
The Action Timer is a timer that can play, pause, stop, and fire timing events at intervals or
specified times. In the Actions Editor you can create behavior for the Action Timer that will
respond to the On media timing and On media complete events.

This ToolBook Instructor-Only catalog object provides the means to implement a Timer without using OpenScript.
OpenScript has a standard timerStart() function but since OpenScript will not export to DHTML this Action Timer
object was introduced for use in DHTML - although it works fine in Native ToolBook too.
Purpose
Essentially a timer is used to measure a lapse in time. What actions you perform once that time has elapsed is up to you -
and you will need to program those actions using the Actions Editor in Instructor. For example here are a few reasons
you might want to use an Action Timer:
• You want to limit the amount of time a user spends on a single page in your book.
• You want to set up a series of actions to occur, similar to what you might configure with an Action Trigger, but
your needs are more complex.
• You want to flash an object on and off, perhaps an image of a warning light, until the user responds and clicks
on an abort button.
• To slide an object across the screen in a specified amount of time - without using Path Animation.
Type Of Timer
When using this Action Timer object, there are essentially two ways to configure the timer.

• Countdown timer
This is likely to be what you most often use. Think of this as being similar to an oven timer. You set the timer
for 1 minute [60000 milliseconds] and it will slowly count down and it will let you know when that time has
passed by sending a MediaComplete event.
• Time Of Day timer
This timer actually counts up rather than down. The starting value for counting up is not 0 however, it is
actually just reporting the number of milliseconds which have elapsed since January 1, 1970. This is useful for
determining how much time has passed. A MediaComplete event is never sent for this type of timer, since there
is no means to specify when the timer should end.

41 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Action Timer

• Auto Start
This determines if the timer will automatically start when you enter the page. If you want to start the timer at
some other point, you will need to manually start it by using the Play action in the Actions Editor. Why Play?
This object works pretty much by pretending that it is a media player.
• Fire Events
If checked, sends time marker events at the intervals specified on the Time Markers tab and sends a
MediaComplete event when the timer has finished.
Time Markers
Going back to my example of thinking of the Action Timer as an Oven Timer, Time Markers are best explained in much
the same way. If you set your oven timer for 4 hours to cook a turkey, you obviously want to the timer to notify you at
the end of that 4 hour period but you also may want to know when there is 1 hour left - so you can baste the turkey, 30
minutes left - so you can perhaps remove the tin foil covering the top of the turkey and 15 minutes left - so you can
extract much of the expelled juices for making a gravy.
Now, even my fancy oven timer is not able to do this - perhaps the ovens of the future will. But ToolBook can, and that
is exactly what the Time Markers can be used for.
• Specific Times:
As you can see below I have configured my 1 minute (60000 millisecond) timer to fire off Time Marker
messages at 60000, 40000, 20000, and 5000 milliseconds. I didn't configure one for 0 because the
MediaComplete message will be sent when the timer ends.

• Periodic
The Periodic type of Time Marker is for cases where you are not interested in knowing when a variable amount
of time has elapsed, but rather you are only interested in knowing when a specific amount of time has passed.
For example if I want a warning light graphic to appear to flash on and off at regular intervals I might configure
a 500 millisecond (1/2 second) Periodic marker type.
Controlling the Action Timer
Using the Actions Editor you can control the Action Timer in a variety of ways:
• Play
To start an Action Timer you can use the Play Media action. This will also resume an Action Timer if it was
previously paused.
• Stop
To terminate or stop an Action Timer before it naturally terminates itself, you can use the Stop Media action.
• Pause
To pause an Action Timer, you can use the Pause Media action. While an Action Timer is paused it will not fire
events.

42 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Action Timer

Getting Information from the Action Timer


Using the Actions Editor you can get various information from the Action Timer:
• MediaComplete
Event Message for Actions Editor - This event is sent to the Action Timer when the timer expires or when the
timer is stopped. If the Fire Events option is not enabled, this event will not be sent.

• MediaTimingEvent
Event Message for Actions Editor - This event is sent to the Action Timer when a Time Marker position has
been reached or when the Time Marker interval has elapsed when using the Periodic type. If the Fire Events
option is not enabled, this event will not be sent.
One single parameter is available for this event. The parameter is mediaPosition and represents the exact
position of the Timer when the event was triggered. You can use this value to determine what specific action to
take (hide or show objects for example).

• MediaPosition
Property of the Action Timer for the Actions Editor - Not to be confused with the mediaPosition parameter of
the MediaTimingEvent - this MediaPosition property is a readable property of the timer. You can read this
property at any time and it will report the position of the Timer.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 43


Action Timer

• MediaPlaying
Property of the Action Timer for the Actions Editor - This property will have a value of TRUE if the Timer is
currently going, but will return FALSE if it is stopped or paused.

44 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Choose Browser
NATIVE ONLY
The Choose Browser button allows the user to select the Web browser that will open when a
URL is specified in the book.

Purpose
For a Native ToolBook application (or Neuron), anytime you perform a hyperlink to a web address ToolBook will need
to open a Browser to show the web page in. What browser should ToolBook use? ToolBook could perhaps use the same
logic your computer does, and use the Default browser configured for that machine, however ToolBook uses its own
logic. ToolBook will use whatever browser is pre-configured to be the default browser for ToolBook.
If there is no pre-configured browser when a hyperlink is attempted, ToolBook will prompt the user to make a choice,
and then store that choice as the future default browser.
The ability to modify which browser is the ToolBook default browser is controlled by using this Choose Browser button.
It will scan the current computer and present a list of installed browsers to choose from, and then store that choice in the
TB85R.INI file where the default setting is maintained.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 45


Exit
DHTML or NATIVE
Your ToolBook II application closes when the user clicks the Exit button at Reader level.

Purpose
This button behaves a bit different depending on how you deploy your content:
• If used in a Native ToolBook application, this Exit button will close the ToolBook window, exiting ToolBook.
• If you use this button in a DHTML application, it will close the browser window which contained the button. It
will not, however, close the launcher window too - since it is a separate window.
• For a Neuron application, the ToolBook application will close but the browser window will remain open.

46 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Exit with Confirmation
DHTML or NATIVE
Clicking this button at Reader level displays a Yes/No dialog box that gives the user the
option to exit.

Purpose
This button behaves a bit different depending on how you deploy your content, however in all cases using this button
will prompt the user if they really want to exit or not.
• If used in a Native ToolBook application, this Exit button will close the ToolBook window, exiting ToolBook.
• If you use this button in a DHTML application, it will close the browser window which contained the button. It
will not, however, close the launcher window too - since it is a separate window.
• For a Neuron application, the ToolBook application will close but the browser window will remain open.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 47


Run Application
NATIVE ONLY
Use the Run button to start another program at Reader level. The program you specify must
be installed on the userís computer in order for the program to start when the user clicks the
Run button.

The Run Application button sounds like a very useful button to have but in reality its usefulness is very limited.
Purpose
The purpose of the button is to allow you to point to an application on your development computer and when you click
the button it will attempt to run that program.

Sounds great, but it will be very unlikely that your end-users will have the same application in the exact same path on
their machine. In my example above, I have pointed to NOTEPAD.EXE in the Windows directory.
This will work fine on another machine as long as the path to the application is c:\windows\notepad.exe. Unfortunately
it is very common for the Windows directory be named WINNT on a Windows NT or 2000 machine, which would cause
the path to be incorrect and fail on an end-user machine.

48 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Open Document
DHTML or NATIVE
Use the Open document button to display any type of file by starting another program at Reader
level. The host program, such as Excel or Word, launches the file you specify based on the file's
extension. The host program must be installed on the users computer in order for the program to run
when the user clicks the Open document button.

Purpose
If you have some external files, such as some Acrobat (.pdf) files, maybe some Word (.doc) or Excel (.xls) file, and you
want to ship them as part of your project and have ToolBook open them for you, this Open Document button is the
easiest way to do it.
The suggested way to use this is:
• Create a subdirectory in your project folder and call it perhaps EXTRAFILES.
• Put your various external files in this EXTRAFILES folder.
• Use one or more of the Open Document buttons to point to your files.

By keeping your external files contained in subdirectories of your project folder, it makes it easy and convenient to move
your project elsewhere (to another machine, a zip disk, etc) and expect that ToolBook can still find those external files
when it comes time to open them. Because the external files are inside of the project directory, anytime you move the
project, the external files move too.
If you export your project to DHTML, the export process will move a copy of the files into your Web Export folder so
that it will work properly once you move your exported files to a Web Server and load it in your browser.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 49


Play Audio with Bullets 1 & 2
DHTML or NATIVE
The bullet audio object allows the user to turn on or off the audio file
assigned to play when a bullet object enters the page. To listen to the
assigned audio file, the user selects the bullet audio object and then
clicks the page to view the bullet text and listen to the file.

This catalog object works directly in conjunction with the Bullet Text objects.
Purpose
The Bullet Text objects have the ability to play a sound file as the bullet slides onto the screen, and this object controls if
that sound file will be played or not. Think of it as a user configurable "sound off/on" switch.

50 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Bullet Text Level 1 (1)(2)(3) and Level 2 (1)(2)(3)
DHTML or NATIVE
The bulleted text object enters the page in motion when the user clicks the
mouse anywhere on the page. The text slides in from the left at Reader level
and stops at the position where you placed the bulleted text object on the
page at Author level. The indented position of bullets is relative to the location
of the first bullet. When the bullet text makes its appearance, you can have a
sound file play by specifying the sound file on the Media tab of the Audio
Bullet Properties dialog box.

WARNING This object was broken in the shipping version of Instructor 8.5 but was fixed in time for the shipment of Assistant 8.5. If you
are an Instructor 8.5 user you will need to install a patch to fix this. The details of the problem as well as the patch are
outlined in Knowledge Base article Q102029971500020 on the Click2learn web site.

Purpose
This functionality can be described as a fly-in bullet with an option to have sound accompany this effect. To make the
bullet fly-in all you need to do is click on an empty portion of the screen. Click again, and the next bullet will fly in. This
will continue until all the bullet text objects have slid onto the screen. The bullets will automatically slide back off of the
edge of the screen when you switch to Reader level on that page. Also when you Export to DHTML they will properly
stage themselves off the edge of the screen so that they are in the correct position when loaded in your browser.
Basics
If you add this object to your page, it will simply drop wherever you place it - but when you drop a second one on the
page the two communicate with each other and coordinate the proper positioning of the bullets so that they appear
equally spaced and aligned with each other. Continue to drop more and they continue to work with each other to
maintain alignment.
Take notice of the fact that there is a Level 1 and Level 2 style for each of the fly-in bullets. The Level 2 bullets have
smaller bullet image as well as smaller text. Most notably, they are forced to a position that is slightly indented from a
Level 1 bullet.
NOTE The bullet alignment behavior cannot be turned off or disabled. This means it is not possible to have a grouping
of bullets on the left edge of your page and another grouping of bullets on the right edge...they will instead all
fall inline with each other.
Reordering the Bullets
If you want to reorder them (flip-flopping the position of bullet 2 and 3 for example) simply drag bullet 3 to a position on
your screen a bit higher than where bullet 2 is, and they will switch positions.
The position of all the bullets is based on the location of the bullet which is located highest on the screen. By this I mean
the bullet that is nearest to the top edge of your ToolBook window. All of the remaining bullets take their position based
on this starting point.
This means that if you need to move your entire list of bullets over and up an inch, all you need to do is relocate the top
bullet and the rest will automatically follow.
Editing the Text
As you edit the text of one of these bullet objects by typing directly onto the screen, the text will word wrap if needed
and the bullets will shuffle down to make room for the additional text. If you remove a line of word wrapped text, the
bullets will reshuffle to collapse the unneeded extra space.
It is possible to change the font size, color, style, etc...just like you would for any text field. Use the Character properties
[F6] to modify the font, size and style, and use the color tray to change the color if you like.
Using the Property editor for this object, you will find that you can modify the text of the bullet object without typing it
directly onto the screen, unfortunately you lose control over character level formatting if you use this editor, since the
editor only understands unformatted raw text.

51 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Bullet Text

Fly-In Speed
Each bullet you add can slide in at a speed defined by the following Speed choices offered in the Property editor for the
Bullet object:
• Fast
Speed is relative, especially when different speed computers are used, but this is the fastest speed possible.
• Medium
This speed is slower than Fast but faster than Slow. How's that for stating the obvious?
• Slow
Still a decent speed, but the slowest speed possible.
• Static
This setting prevents the bullet from sliding back off the edge of the screen when the page is reset - when
switching from Author to Reader level for example. This bullet will not have a slide effect and will stay visible
and positioned in its on-screen position at all times.
Changing the Bullet Graphic
There are three large fly-in bullet styles in the catalog. The Blue Triangle, Orange Triangle and Blue Oval. Of course
there are also three more but in smaller versions. Since the image used is just a resource of the book, feel free to swap out
the image used by these bullet objects.
For example if I wanted to have a nice round white bullet instead of the large Blue Oval, I would need to:
1. Create a replacement image in a graphics program such as Photoshop
2. Save it as a graphic file
3. Using the Resource Manager find and select the large Blue Oval image
4. Click the replace button in the Resource Manager
5. Choose the newly created bullet graphic file
This will replace the image for all large Blue Oval bullet objects in the entire book.
Assigning a Media Clip
If you would like an audio sound effect to play when the bullet flies into the page, you can configure this on the Media
Tab of the Properties for Bullet dialog. You can even record your own short sound clip directly from within this editor if
you like.

52 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Bullet Text

There is an optional separate object in the catalog named Play Audio With Bullets which you can place onto your page to
allow the end-user to enable or disable the audio that is played by the fly-in bullets.
Programmatically Triggering the Fly-In To Occur
At times you may want to trigger the fly-in effect programmatically, instead of at the users request. You can do this both
from OpenScript as well as from the Actions Editor.
• If you are using OpenScript you can force the next bullet to fly in programmatically by sending a buttonClick
message to the page object.
• If you are using the Actions Editor you can force the next bullet to fly in programmatically by using the Trigger
action and setting the target of that trigger to be the page object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 53


Bullet Text

54 Catalog Category: Action Objects


ASPEN CDS - LXS Catalog Category

These objects provide Aspen functionality when your DHTML exported content is used in the Click2learn Aspen CDS
or LXS product.
They have no real purpose in a Native application, so if your book is configured for Native deployment, this category
will not even appear in the catalog.
DHTML Mode View:

55 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Add A Link
DHTML ONLY
Opens the add link dialog box in the Aspen Learning Experience Server.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

56 Catalog Category: Aspen CDS - LXS


Add A Note
DHTML ONLY
Opens the add note dialog box in the Aspen Learning Experience Server.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 57


Ask An Expert
DHTML ONLY
Displays the Experts dialog box in the Learning Experience Server.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

58 Catalog Category: Aspen CDS - LXS


Exit
DHTML ONLY
Closes the course.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 59


Home
DHTML ONLY
Navigates to the home page.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

60 Catalog Category: Aspen CDS - LXS


View Glossary
DHTML ONLY
Opens the glossary in the Learning Experience Server.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 61


View Help
DHTML ONLY
Opens the Help file in the Learning Experience Server.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

62 Catalog Category: Aspen CDS - LXS


View Personal Feedback
DHTML ONLY
Shows personal feedback in the Learning Experience Server.

Purpose
This ASPEN catalog object is nothing more than a button object with a bit of Actions Editor code applied to it. The
Actions Editor code assigned to this button is shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 63


64 Catalog Category: Aspen CDS - LXS
BUTTONS Catalog Category

Buttons are often used to trigger events or set properties. All of the buttons in this category have no special behavior
assigned to them. They are provided in the Catalog pretty much for the use of ToolBook Assistant users who have no
ability to create a button in any other way. ToolBook Instructor users can draw buttons using the standard Tool Palette.
Native Mode View: DHTML Mode View:

65 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Pushbutton
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a
button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic
or a caption or both.

This is a standard button type with a beveled edge and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the
Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to invert for a
moment, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

66 Catalog Category: Buttons


Command
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a
button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic
or a caption or both.

This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a slightly different
bevel effect. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to learn about the
general behavior of a button.
There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Command Button does not exist on the Tool
Palette. Having a Command Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project.
It is possible to change an existing button to a Command Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border
Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button
drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Command Button in order to make it appear
in ToolBook as a Command Button.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 67


Shadow
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a
button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic
or a caption or both.

This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a Shadow effect
rather than a bevel effect. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to
learn about the general behavior of a button.
There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Shadow Button does not exist on the Tool
Palette. Having a Shadow Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project.
It is possible to change an existing button to a Shadow Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border
Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button
drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Shadowed in order to make it appear in
ToolBook as a Shadow Button.

68 Catalog Category: Buttons


Rounded
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a
button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic
or a caption or both.

This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a Rounded edge
effect rather than a bevel effect. The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button
to learn about the general behavior of a button.
There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Rounded Button does not exist on the Tool
Palette. Having a Rounded Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project.
It is possible to change an existing button to a Rounded Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border
Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button
drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Rounded in order to make it appear in
ToolBook as a Rounded Button.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 69


Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a
button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a
graphic or a caption or both.

This button looks very much like the regular Push Button. The only difference is that this version has a no bevel edge.
The behavior of this button is the same as the Push Button. See the entry for Push Button to learn about the general
behavior of a button.
There is no way to directly draw this type of button in ToolBook since the Rectangle Button does not exist on the Tool
Palette. Having a Rectangle Button in the Catalog makes it easy to add one to your project.
It is possible to change an existing button to a Rectangle Button by using the Properties for Button dialog. The Border
Style defines what a button looks like and you can freely switch between types. So, if you had a regular Push Button
drawn on your page, all you would need to do is change the Border Style to Rectangle in order to make it appear in
ToolBook as a Rectangle Button.

70 Catalog Category: Buttons


Checkbox 3D
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button
to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a
caption or both.

This is a standard button type with a 3D looking Checkbox, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by
using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or
uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 71


Radio Button
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
NATIVE ONLY
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button
to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a
caption or both.

This is a standard button type with a flat [non-3D] looking Radio Button, and can be drawn in ToolBook
Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or
uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML [exporting this style button will generate the 3D style version when viewing in a browser].
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

72 Catalog Category: Buttons


Checkbox
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
NATIVE ONLY
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button
to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a
caption or both.

This is a standard button type with a flat [non-3D] looking Checkbox Button, and can be drawn in ToolBook
Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or
uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML [exporting this style button will generate the 3D style version when viewing in a browser].
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 73


Radio Button 3D
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a
button to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic
or a caption or both.

This is a standard button type with a 3D looking Radio Button, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by
using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default a button has no predefined behavior. When you click on it, other than appearing to check or
uncheck itself, it does nothing. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

74 Catalog Category: Buttons


Label
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use a button for a variety of purposes. You can assign an action sequence or a script to a button
to specify its behavior, or you can create a hyperlink for a button. A button can display a graphic or a
caption or both.

This is a standard button type, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown
to the right.
By default a button has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 75


76 Catalog Category: Buttons
DRAW OBJECTS Catalog Category

ToolBook comes with its own graphical object types to help you create basic objects such as a rectangle, or line. These
objects are movable once drawn on the screen, allowing you to reposition them, resize them, reshape them, modify their
colors, etc.
They are provided in the Catalog pretty much for the use of ToolBook Assistant users who have no ability to create a
draw object in any other way. ToolBook Instructor users can draw these using the standard Tool Palette.
If you export your project to DHTML, draw objects are typically converted into GIF images. Internet Explorer however,
knows how to directly draw these types of objects in the browser environment without the need to have the object
rendered as a GIF image. To enable this feature, ensure the checkbox on the Web tab of the Property sheet for the
specific object is checked. Netscape does not have this same ability, so even if you check this option, only Internet
Explorer will benefit from it. Netscape will continue to use the exported GIF images.

Native and DHTML Mode View:

77 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Triangle
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected
polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a
node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location.
To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Triangle draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 3 sides. Using
ToolBook Instructor a triangle shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to
the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 3 sided polygon
prior to actually drawing one.
By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over
the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron)
but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export
the content to the web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain
events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse
over the object (on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in
ToolBook as well as in DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

78 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Square
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected
polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node,
hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To
remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Square draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 4 sides. Using
ToolBook Instructor a square shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to the
right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 4 sided polygon prior
to actually drawing one. Note that whereas the Square catalog object is actually a 4 sided Polygon
object, the Rectangle catalog object is an object type in and of itself. The only real difference is that
you can edit the shape of a Polygon - to add or remove line segments if you like. However you cannot
do this to a Rectangle object, as a rectangle must have 4 sides.
By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over
the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron)
but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export
the content to the web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain
events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse
over the object (on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in
ToolBook as well as in DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 79


Pentagon
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected
polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a
node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location.
To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Pentagon draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 5 sides. Using
ToolBook Instructor a pentagon shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to
the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 5 sided polygon
prior to actually drawing one.
By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over
the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron)
but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export
the content to the web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain
events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse
over the object (on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in
ToolBook as well as in DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

80 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Hexagon
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected
polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node,
hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To
remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Hexagon draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 6 sides. Using
ToolBook Instructor a hexagon shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to
the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 6 sided polygon
prior to actually drawing one.
By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over
the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron)
but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export
the content to the web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain
events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse
over the object (on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in
ToolBook as well as in DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 81


Octagon
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a selected
polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add a node,
hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To
remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Octagon draw object is really just a Polygon object which happens to have 8 sides. Using
ToolBook Instructor an octagon shaped Polygon can be drawn by using the Tool Palette as shown to
the right. It will be necessary to verify that the Polygon Palette be configured for a 8 sided polygon
prior to actually drawing one.
By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over
the object (mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron)
but will not work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export
the content to the web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain
events occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse
over the object (on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in
ToolBook as well as in DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

82 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Freeform Polygon
DHTML or NATIVE
You can draw a polygon of any shape with this tool. Click to add a vertex point when the pencil
cursor is displayed. Double-click to finish your polygon. Tip: To change the shape of a selected
polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change the shape. To add
a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag the new node to a different
location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Freeform Polygon draw object is not really an object but rather a process of allowing you to draw an
Irregular Polygon object with any number of line segments you want. When you drag this object out of the
catalog it turns into a pencil which you can use to place (by clicking) polygon nodes on the page. ToolBook
Instructor users can draw one of these using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. The only difference in
behavior is that no pencil is displayed as the drawing is occurring. Instead, only a cross-hair cursor is shown.
By default a Polygon has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 83


Circle
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape a circle or an ellipse by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you
can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the object. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the
CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.

The Circle draw object is really just an Ellipse draw object in which the height and width are the same,
making it appear as an exact circle rather than an oval, and can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using
the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default an Ellipse or Circle has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

84 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Ellipse
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape a circle or an ellipse by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog
box you can apply a variety of colors and line styles to the object. Tip: To resize an object
proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.

The Ellipse draw object comes out of the catalog in a slightly oval shape, not perfectly circular in form, and
can be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
By default an Ellipse has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 85


Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape a rectangle by dragging its handles. Tip: To resize an object
proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.

The Rectangle draw object comes out of the catalog in a slightly non-square shape and can be drawn in
ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. Note that the Rectangle object is an
object type in and of itself, whereas the Square catalog object is actually a 4 sided Polygon object. The only
real difference is that you can edit the shape of a Polygon - to add or remove line segments if you like.
However you cannot do this to a Rectangle object, as a rectangle must have 4 sides.
By default a Rectangle has no predefined behavior. There are several ways however to add behavior.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

86 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Rounded Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape a rounded rectangle by dragging its handles. Tip: To resize an object
proportionally, press the CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.

The Rounded Rectangle draw object comes out of the catalog in a slightly non-square shape and can be
drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 87


Freeform Angled Line
DHTML or NATIVE
You can draw any shape of angled line with this tool. Click to add a vertex point when the pencil
cursor is displayed. Double-click to finish your line. Tip: To add a vertex to a finished angled line,
while all the vertexes are selected press the SHIFT key and click an existing vertex. Drag the new
vertex to a different location. To remove a vertex, press CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing vertex.

The Freeform Angled Line is not really an object in and of itself, but is rather a process for creating an
Angled Line with as many line segments as you wish. This can also be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by
using the Tool Palette as shown to the right. When drawing your own line with the Tool Palette you can
draw as many segments as you like - double-clicking when you have placed your last node.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

88 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Simple Curve
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape a curve by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a
variety of colors and line styles to the curve. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key
as you drag a corner handle.

The Simple Curve as well as the Complex Curve catalog objects are both really just Curve Draw Objects,
where the Simple one has only one curve and the Complex one has two. ToolBook Instructor users can draw
their own Curve objects by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right where you can add as many curves
to your Curve object as you like.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 89


Arc
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape an arc by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can apply a
variety of colors and line styles to the arc. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the CTRL key as you
drag a corner handle.

The Arc Draw Object is an ellipse where you get to decide how much of the perimeter of the ellipse you
want to see. By default an Arc will be added to your page as a ¼ segment of a ellipse, but you can adjust
what portion of the arc is visible by selecting Reshape Arc from the Draw menu and adjusting the arc end
points. ToolBook Instructor users can add an Arc to their page by using the Tool Palette as show to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

90 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Pie
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and reshape a pie shape by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can
apply a variety of colors and line styles to the pie shape. Tip: To resize an object proportionally, press the
CTRL key as you drag a corner handle.

The Pie Draw Object is an ellipse where you get to decide how much of the ellipse you want to see. By
default a Pie will be added to your page as a ¼ segment of a ellipse, but you can adjust what portion of the
pie is visible by selecting Reshape Pie from the Draw menu and adjusting the pie end points. ToolBook
Instructor users can add a Pie to their page by using the Tool Palette as show to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 91


Line
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch or shrink a line object by dragging its handles. In the Properties dialog box you can
apply a variety of colors and line styles to a line.

The Line is a standard ToolBook Draw Object and can also be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the
Tool Palette as shown to the right.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

92 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


Angled Line
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the shape of a
selected polygon, choose Reshape Angled Line from the Draw menu. Drag a node to change
the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing node, and then drag
the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold down CTRL+SHIFT and click an
existing node.

The Angled Line is a 3 segment line and can also be drawn in ToolBook Instructor by using the Tool Palette
as shown to the right. When drawing your own line with the Tool Palette you can draw as many segments as
you like - double-clicking when you have placed your last node.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 93


Complex Curve
DHTML or NATIVE
You can stretch and resize a polygon by dragging its handles. Tip: To change the
shape of a selected polygon, choose Reshape Polygon from the Draw menu. Drag a
node to change the shape. To add a node, hold down the SHIFT key, click an existing
node, and then drag the new node to a different location. To remove a node, hold
down CTRL+SHIFT and click an existing node.

The Complex Curve as well as the Simple Curve catalog objects are both really just Curve Draw Objects,
where the Simple one has only one curve and the Complex one has two. ToolBook Instructor users can draw
their own Curve objects by using the Tool Palette as shown to the right where you can add as many curves
to your Curve object as you like.
OpenScript
Using OpenScript you can a add handler to the object to control what happens when certain events occur,
such as when the user clicks on the object (buttonClick) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(mouseEnter). Any behavior you add using OpenScript will work in ToolBook (or Neuron) but will not
work at all in DHTML. Use the Actions Editor to add behavior if your goal is to export the content to the
web.
Actions Editor Script
Using the Actions Editor to add extended behavior, you can control what happens when certain events
occur, such as when the user clicks on the object (on Click) or when the user rolls the mouse over the object
(on Mouse Over). Any behavior you add using the Actions Editor will work in ToolBook as well as in
DHTML.
ToolTips
Without writing any code at all you can specify a ToolTip to display as you mouse over the object.

94 Catalog Category: Draw Objects


MEDIA (ANIMATED) Catalog Category

This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists. All
of the objects in the category are Cell Animations.
Cell Animation
A Cell Animation is similar to a cartoon, where the animation is actually just a series of still images that are flipped in
rapid succession. The Path Animation tool in ToolBook can make an object move across your screen, or it can be
configured as a Cell Animation, or both.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

95 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Animated Helicopter
DHTML or NATIVE
This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.

This Animated Helicopter catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 6 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play
Media action:

Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using
the Actions Editor:

96 Catalog Category: Media (Animated)


Animated Top
DHTML or NATIVE
This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.

This Animated Top catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 5 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play
Media action:

Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using
the Actions Editor:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 97


Animated Globe
DHTML or NATIVE
This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.

This Animated Globe catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 3 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play
Media action:

Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using
the Actions Editor:

98 Catalog Category: Media (Animated)


Animated Gears
DHTML or NATIVE
This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.

This Animated Gears catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 9 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play
Media action:

Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using
the Actions Editor:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 99


Animated Clock
DHTML or NATIVE
This animation will begin playing when an action trigger button is clicked at Reader level.

This Animated Clock catalog objects is really just a Cell Animation comprised of 25 separate Paint Objects.
Starting An Animation
A Path Animation can be started by using an Action Trigger catalog object or by using the Actions Editor using the Play
Media action:

Resetting An Animation
A Path Animation can be reset to its original position and first Cell by using the Reset Trigger catalog object or by using
the Actions Editor:

100 Catalog Category: Media (Animated)


MEDIA (BACKDROPS) Catalog Category

This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
Definition
A Backdrop is defined as a Bitmap Resource that is assigned to a background so that the image can be used for a
background image. This image will be displayed behind all objects you put on the background or page.
You can configure the image in a variety of layout styles as follows:
• None
• Center of background
• Stretch to fill
• Tile from upper left
• Tile from center
• Checkerboard style 1
• Checkerboard style 2
• Checkerboard style 3
• Checkerboard style 4

DHTML Notes
The following three styles are not supported in DHTML:
• Tile from center (Tile from upper left is substituted)
• Checkerboard 3 (Checkerboard 1 is substituted)
• Checkerboard 4 (Checkerboard 2 is substituted)

101 Catalog Category: Action Objects


All Backdrops
DHTML or NATIVE
A backdrop appears on all pages that share a background. This graphic image can also be used
as an individual graphic that will appear on the foreground of a single page.

All of the various styles of Backdrops found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because
they all behave identically. The only real differences between each of them are the size and color scheme.
General Usage
When you double-click on one of these Catalog objects (or drag one onto your page) you will be presented with the
following dialog asking how you would like to apply this Catalog object to your book.
You can choose Backdrop, or Bitmap on the Page. For this discussion we are talking about Backdrops so you will likely
want to choose that. You will also be able to set the Style for the backdrop.

Choices
ToolBook ships with 43 different Backdrops in this category, which come in 3 ranges of size.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

102 Catalog Category: Media (Backdrops)


MEDIA (CLIP ART) Catalog Category

This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
Definition
All of the objects in the Clip Art category are just Button objects with a Bitmap Resource applied as the NormalGraphic
image. These images are not Picture Objects nor Paint Objects.
General Usage
There are 3 ways to add one of these images to your book.
1. When you drag one onto a blank area of your page you will be presented with the following dialog asking how
you would like to apply this Catalog object to your book. By default it presumes you want to add the image to
the page as a button with the selected bitmap image applied as the NormalGraphic image. Alternately you can
choose to set the image as the current Backdrop if you like.

If you choose a Bitmap On The Page, you will end up with a Graphics Placeholder object on the page which
incidentally is the same thing as a Reusable Graphic Placeholder. This Graphics Placeholder has some extended
properties you can configure:

Although an Output Format option is presented, it does not work. It is actually a holdover from the days when
ToolBook's web export did not create DHTML, but rather just plain HTML. ToolBook uses its own logic to

103 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Media (Clip Art)

determine if your image will be exported as a GIF or JPG, based on a number of factors such as if the image has
a Chromakey value assigned.

2. When you drag one onto an existing button object in your book, you will be presented with the following dialog
asking which Graphic State you want the image applied to, as well as what kind of sizing behavior you wish to
apply.

3. When you drag one into a field, the image will be inserted into the text of the field as an in-line image. In this
example I wanted to put a Thumb Tack in front of a line of text.

104 Catalog Category: Media (Clip Art)


All Clip Art
DHTML or NATIVE
Use to add graphical interest to your page.

All of the various Clip Art images found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they
all behave identically.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 179 different image in this category, which can be seen below.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 105


Media (Clip Art)

106 Catalog Category: Media (Clip Art)


MEDIA (ICONS) Catalog Category

This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
Definition
All of the objects in the Icons category are just Button objects with a Icon Resource applied as the NormalGraphic
image. These images are not Picture Objects nor Paint Objects.
General Usage
There are 3 ways to add one of these images to your book.
1. When you drag one onto a blank area of your page you will be end up with a button object. The icon image you
see is an Icon Resource assigned as the Normal Graphic of the object.

2. When you drag one onto an existing button object in your book you will be presented with the following dialog
asking which Graphic State you want the image applied to, as well as what kind of sizing behavior you wish to
apply.

3. When you drag one into a field, the image will be inserted into the text of the field as an in-line image. In this
example I wanted to put a Check Mark in front of a line of text.

107 Catalog Category: Action Objects


All Icons
DHTML or NATIVE
Use to add graphical interest to your page.

All of the various Icon images found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they all
behave identically.
General Usage
When you drag one onto a blank area of your page you will be end up with a button object. The icon image you see is an
Icon Resource assigned as the Normal Graphic of the object.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 161 different image in this category, which can be seen below.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

108 Catalog Category: Media (Icons)


MEDIA (TILED BACKDROPS) Catalog Category

This category is hidden by default when you install ToolBook so it is likely that you have never noticed that it exists.
Definition
A Backdrop is defined as a Bitmap Resource that is assigned to a background so that the image can be used for a
background image. This image will be displayed behind all objects you put on the background or page.
You can configure the image in a variety of layout styles as follows:
• None
• Center of background
• Stretch to fill
• Tile from upper left
• Tile from center
• Checkerboard style 1
• Checkerboard style 2
• Checkerboard style 3
• Checkerboard style 4

DHTML Notes
The following three styles are not supported in DHTML:
• Tile from center (Tile from upper left is substituted)
• Checkerboard 3 (Checkerboard 1 is substituted)
• Checkerboard 4 (Checkerboard 2 is substituted)

109 Catalog Category: Action Objects


All Backdrops
DHTML or NATIVE
A backdrop appears on all pages that share a background. This graphic image can also be
used as an individual graphic that will appear on the foreground of a single page.

All of the various Backdrops found in this catalog category are presented in this one definition page because they all
behave identically. The only real differences between each of them are the size and color scheme.
General Usage
When you double-click on one of these Catalog objects (or drag one onto your page) you will be presented with the
following dialog asking how you would like to apply this Catalog object to your book.
You can choose Backdrop, or Bitmap on the Page. For this discussion we are talking about Backdrops so you will likely
want to choose that. You will also be able to set the Style for the backdrop.

Choices
ToolBook ships with 40 different Backdrops in this category, as seen below.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

110 Catalog Category: Media (Tiled Backdrops)


MEDIA PLAYERS Catalog Category

Objects you use to play and control audio and visual file-based media clips, including wave audio, digital video, and still
images.
Native Mode View:

DHTML Mode View:

111 Catalog Category: Action Objects


Universal Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
The Universal Media Player can play most modern digital video, audio, or streaming media files.
You can use the time markers feature of this player to start an action (such as the display of
text) at a specific moment when the media is playing.

If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming media
files.

If you are interested in playing media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look
at. It will play virtually any media file you can find.
Purpose
The purpose of the Universal Media Player (UMP) is to provide you with a single media player which will play almost
any media file you need to play. In addition to this ability is also the ability to let the Actions Editor know when the
media has finished (On Media Complete) or when certain positions have been reached within the media (On Media
Timing Event).
Media History
Historically, ToolBook's media playback has been handled by the use of OpenScript and playing Clips. ToolBook's Clip
System can play back AVI, WAV and MIDI files by default and can also play back more types such as MPG if you
happen to get the right MCI Drivers installed on your machine.
With the introduction of ActiveX Support in ToolBook 6, a whole new world of media types became accessible to
ToolBook. For example, by implementing a Windows Media Player ActiveX Control within ToolBook you can play all
these media types, simply because Microsoft has built this wide ranging support into the Windows Media Player:
ASF, ASX, WM, WMA, WMV, WAX, MID, MIDI, RMI, WAV, AVI, MP3,
MPA, M3U, MPG, MPEG, M1V, MP2, MOV, QT, AIF, AIFC, AIFF
Most users have moved away from using the Clip System and are now using ActiveX to play back media. The Clip
System does still exist in ToolBook and you are free to use it, although using it will require knowing OpenScript to setup
and control the playback of the Clips you add to ToolBook.
Details
When you sift though all the details about what the Universal Media Player is and how it works, the bottom line is that
the Universal Media Player is a wrapper object for the RealPlayer, Windows Media Player and Flash ActiveX control
objects.
When you configure a media file in the Universal Media Player, the underlying logic of the Universal Media Player will
detected the file type you specified and dynamically create the appropriate ActiveX Control container objects inside of
the Universal Media Player group object, permitting it to play your file. If you change your mind and choose a different
file type, the Universal Media Player may very well destroy the previously created ActiveX Control container and draw a
new one appropriate for playing your newly chosen file type.
The initial look of the Universal Media Player when you add it to your page is an unconfigured look. As you configure
the Universal Media Player and it gets associated with one of the ActiveX controls you will see its appearance change to
one of the following:

NOT YET CONFIGURED WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER REAL PLAYER FLASH


(May also appear solid white)

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 112


Universal Media Player

General Tab
Configuring the Universal Media Player to play a file starts with telling it where the media file is located at on your hard
drive, as well as defining some basic behaviors.
NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your
media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import
so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another
machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.

• Player Name
If you have multiple Universal Media Players on a single page, it will be a good idea to give each of your
Universal Media Players a unique name. By default each Universal Media Player is named "Universal Media
Player".
• Media Source
This is the location of the media file configured to be played. Use the little folder icon at the edge of the entry
field to choose a media file. If blank, and you know it was configured to point to a file, you have apparently
moved your external media file and now the player cannot locate the file. If you put the file back, and reopen
the editor, the file name will appear as you would expect.
• Auto Start
This options determines whether or not the Universal Media Player will automatically start playing the media
file when the page is entered. This removes the need for the user to have to initiate the play of the media.
• Display Video Region
Depending on the file type you choose and the ActiveX control being used to play the selected file, you may be
able to control whether the video playback region of the media player will be visible to the user. In some cases
you will find that this checkbox is grayed out. In that case, you have no control over the video playback region.
NOTE If the Windows Media Player will be the media player used by the Universal Media Player to play
back your audio file, you can manually hide the video region by simply reducing the height of the
player to the point where only the media controls are available.

• Display Media Controls


Depending on the file type you choose and the ActiveX control being used to play the selected file, you may be
able to control whether the media playback controls of the media player will be visible to the user. In some
cases you will find that this checkbox is grayed out. In that case, you have no control over the media playback
controls.
Advanced Tab
This ToolBook Instructor-Only tab will permit you to change the ActiveX control ToolBook uses for playing back the
various media types the Universal Media Player supports. The Universal Media Player has a built in cross reference table

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 113


Universal Media Player

of media file types and the recommended player to play the file with. This gives ToolBook the ability to guess at the
most likely ActiveX player to use, but gives you the ability to override it.

• Use the following media player to play this media


This combobox will list up to 3 media players: Windows Media Player, RealPlayer, and Flash. You are
permitted to choose any media player listed in the Combobox to be the media player used for your specified
media file.

ToolBook keeps a running list of your preferences. So, although MP3 files are by default played with the
Windows Media Player, if you change the combobox entry to RealPlayer then RealPlayer will be considered the
default player in the future when you try to configure another MP3 file.
• List only recognized media players for specified media file
If checked, the Universal Media Player will not display a media player that it knows can't play your chosen
media file. For example FLASH is unable to play an MPG file, so there is no need to offer FLASH as a choice
in the above combobox. The checkbox was implemented for future consideration. For example, perhaps one day
a new version of FLASH will be able to play an MPG file, and when it does you will need a way of forcing the
Universal Media Player to allow this.
Time Markers Tab
This ToolBook Instructor-Only tab will permit you to setup specific times during the playback of the media, when you
want to be notified. Notification happens by an On Media Timing Event message being send to the Universal Media
Player. Those familiar with the Action Timer catalog object will recognize these tab options, as functionally they work
the same.
If you look at the following screen shot of the Time Markers tab, you will see that I have configured my .RM file to
notify me when it reaches the 2 second mark (2000 milliseconds), as well as when it reaches the 18 second mark. At
those specific times during the playback of the media file I want to trigger some other actions to occur.

114 Catalog Category: Media Players


Universal Media Player

• Enable Time Markers


This turns On or Off the ability for your Universal Media Player to send On Media Timing Event messages
when the configured time intervals have been reached.
• Periodic
If you are not interested in when specific time positions have been reached in the media file you can alternately
ask to be notified every X number of milliseconds.
• Specific Times
If you want to take some sort of action - using the Actions Editor, at very specific times during the playback of
the media file, select this option.
• Add Time Marker
Using the media player which is built-in to the Time Markers tab, you can play your media file. Pressing the
Add Time Marker button while the media is playing will insert the current Time Marker position into the list of
configured time markers.
• Marker Time and Comment
Lists the time markers configured as well as comments to help you remember why you added the marker. Right
click on a comment or marker time to edit the values.
Actions Editor Messages
The Universal Media Player is designed to send an On Media Complete message to itself when the media being played
as finished. Using the Actions Editor, you can write code to handle this message. Seen in the next figure, I have
configured the Universal Media Player to automatically navigate to the next page when the media is complete.

If you have configured Time Markers, the Universal Media Player will send an On Media Timing Event message to itself
when each time marker position is reached. The mediaPosition parameter of the Media Timing Event will contain the
timer marker value. Seen in the next figure, I have configured the Universal Media Player to handle two different time
marker positions.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 115


Popup Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
Use the Popup Universal Media Player to show your media in a window that appears after the
user clicks the Popup Media Player button. At Author level, you can move and resize the video
frame. You can change the caption of the play button, or hide the play button if you intend to
show the media as question feedback. The Popup Universal Media Player can play most
modern digital video, audio, or streaming media files. You can use the time markers feature of
this player to start an action (such as the display of text) at a specific moment when the media is
playing. If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming
media files.

This object is also known as the Popup Universal Media Player. Unfortunately the catalog cannot display 28 character
caption names so it was truncated down to Popup Media Player instead.
If you are interested in playing media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should look
at. It will play virtually any media file you can find.
Since 95% of the functionality is identical to the Universal Media Player, I will ask that you simply refer to the Universal
Media Player information in this book to learn about how it works, and I will cover all of the differences below.
Purpose
The only difference between this Popup Universal Media Player and the Universal Media Player is that this one has the
ability to keep itself hidden until you are ready to play the video.
Details
When you add this catalog object to your page, it comes in as two separate objects.
• One is a button with the caption of Popup Media Player. This is the object you want to select when accessing
the Extended Properties, in order to configure it.
• The other is the Popup Media Frame. The frame is used to define the area of the screen to be used to play your
media. You can move and resize the frame. Each Popup Universal Media Player comes with its own frame but
if you have more than one Popup Universal Media Player on a page you can configure each of them to use the
exact same frame to playback the media. Once reconfigured to all use the same frame, you are free to delete the
other unneeded frames.

You will likely notice that after adding a Popup Universal Media Player to your book a new page is added to the end of
your book. This is normal. The way the Popup Universal Media Player works it complex and this extra page is needed in
order to make it work properly. It is import to not delete that added page, as doing do will break the functionality of the
Popup Universal Media Player you added. If you attempt to delete it you will be warned with a message. If you look at
the page a warning is tiled into the background graphic.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 116


Popup Media Player

General Tab
Configuring the Popup Universal Media Player to play a file starts with telling it where the media file is located at on
your hard drive, as well as defining some behaviors.

• Media Frame
If you have numerous Popup Universal Media Players on your page, you may want to share a single Frame
between more than one Popup Universal Media Player. You can choose which frame to use by using this
combobox. Since they will likely all be named Popup Media Frame, you may find it difficult to tell which one is
which. For that reason the red target symbol has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this
target symbol onto any Frame object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the
correct Frame reference.
• Auto Hide When Media Stops
If you enable the option, when the media in the media player stops, the media will hide itself.
• Delay Hiding Media For:
If you chose to hide the media when it stops, you can designate if you want a delay to occur before the media is
hidden.
• Show In Separate Window
If you enable this option, when the media is popped up (shown) it will be in its own window, complete with
caption bar. It will be possible for the user to then move the playing media as well as close it using the X in the
corner of the window.
• Hide Button At Reader
If you turn on the Auto Start feature, you may want to ensure the Popup Media Player button is hidden at
Reader Level so the user can't see it or use it.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 117


Flash Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
The Flash Media Player can play Macromedia Flash streaming media files with the SWF file
extension.

If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should
look at.
Purpose
The Flash Media Player is actually just a standard Universal Media Player which has been reconfigured to assume you
will be using it for Flash files. You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the
file types supported by the Universal Media Player.
Please refer to the entry for Universal Media Player for details on how to use this object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 118


Popup Flash Player
DHTML or NATIVE
The Popup Flash Player can play Macromedia Flash streaming media files with the SWF file
extension.

Use the Popup Flash Player to show your Flash media in a window that appears after the user
clicks the Popup Flash Player button.

At Author level, you can move and resize the video frame. You can change the caption of the
play button, or hide the play button if you intend to show the media as question feedback.

If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should
look at.
Purpose
The Popup Flash Player is actually just a standard Popup Media Player which has been preconfigured to assume you will
be using it for Flash files. You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file
types supported by the Popup Media Player.
Please refer to the entry for Popup Media Player for details on how to use this object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 119


Correct Feedback
DHTML or NATIVE
This Popup Flash Player is configured to display a media file appropriate for use as question
feedback.

If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should
look at.
Purpose
The Correct Feedback media player is actually just a standard Popup Flash Player which has been preconfigured to
assume it will be playing the Flash file typically located at the following location on your Authoring machine:
Instructor Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Instructor85\Media\Flash\correct.swf

Assistant Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Assistant85\Media\Flash\correct.swf

You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file types supported by the
Popup Media Player. Please refer to the entry for Popup Media Player for details on how to use this object.
Details
This catalog object was created so that you could use it as Feedback for a Question Object. As seen below you can have
a question object play a Media Player as feedback to a question response.

120 Catalog Category: Media Players


Incorrect Feedback
DHTML or NATIVE
This Popup Flash Player is configured to display a media file appropriate for use as question
feedback.

If you are interested in playing Flash media in ToolBook, this is likely to be among the first Catalog objects you should
look at.
Purpose
The Incorrect Feedback media player is actually just a standard Popup Flash Player which has been preconfigured to
assume it will be playing the Flash file typically located at the following location on your Authoring machine:
Instructor Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Instructor85\Media\Flash\incorrect.swf

Assistant Users:
C:\Program Files\click2learn\Assistant85\Media\Flash\incorrect.swf

You are not limited to playing Flash files using this media player. You can play any of the file types supported by the
Popup Media Player. Please refer to the entry for Popup Media Player for details on how to use this object.
Details
This catalog object was created so that you could use it as Feedback for a Question Object. As seen below you can have
a question object play a Media Player as feedback to a question response.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 121


Streaming RealPlayer
NATIVE ONLY
Use this player to include RealSystem G2 streaming media content in your book. To display
your RealMedia file, users must have the RealSystem G2 Player installed on their computers.
This player is available for free download from www.real.com. You can supply a link to the
RealNetworks download page by dragging the Get RealPlayer button from the Navigation
Objects category to your page.

Purpose
The purpose of the Streaming RealPlayer is to provide you with a media player which will play RealNetworks media
types.
This Streaming RealPlayer media player is considered to be outdated and is still around simply for backwards
compatibility with older versions of ToolBook. As such, no details of its use will be provided in this documentation.
If you are interested in playing Real files the recommended player is the Universal Media Player.

122 Catalog Category: Media Players


Streaming MPlayer
NATIVE ONLY
This player is available for free download from the Microsoft Web site. You can supply a link to
the Windows Media download page by dragging the Get Media Player button from the
Navigation Objects category to your page.

Purpose
The purpose of the Streaming MPlayer is to provide you with a media player which will play Windows Media Player
media types.
This media player is considered to be outdated and is still around simply for backwards compatibility with older versions
of ToolBook. As such, no details of its use will be provided in this documentation.
If you are interested in playing Windows Media Player files the recommended player is the Universal Media Player.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 123


Video Player 1, 2, 3
DHTML or NATIVE
Use a video player to show a digital video. You can play a file with an .AVI extension; other
video file formats will play if you have the appropriate driver or control installed (such as .MOV
files).

To learn more about digital video, see the online Help topic, "About digital video files."

If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming media
files.

Purpose
The purpose of the Video Player media players is to provide you with media players which will play AVI files. The
playback mechanism for these 3 players utilizes the built-in media engine inside of ToolBook - the Clip System. This
Clip System utilizes MCI standards and as such can only play media types for which MCI drivers are installed.
These Video Player media players are considered to be somewhat outdated and limited in functionality. If you are
interested in playing media files the recommended player is the Universal Media Player.
Details
The difference between the 3 Video Player media players is pretty much isolated to the look of the control bar at the
bottom of the player. Each offers a different set of controls.

Video Player 1 Video Player 2 Video Player 3


General Tab
Configuring a Video Player media player starts with identify the file you wish to play.

• Name
By default each new Video Player that you add to your book will have a name of "Video Player". It is a good
idea to rename this, giving it a unique name in the event you later need to programmatically refer to the object
using OpenScript or perhaps the Actions Editor.
• Clip to play
Since a Video Player media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into
the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox.
• Choose a Clip
If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is
imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 124


Video Player 1, 2, 3

• Play all of clip before continuing


If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue.
• Play clip continuously in background
If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play
and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page.
Options Tab

• Stage Properties
Opens the Stage Properties dialog.
• Pre-load
Pre-loads the clip when the page is entered in Reader mode for faster startup on play.
• Auto-play
Automatically plays the clip when the page is entered in Reader mode.
• Auto-show
Automatically shows the first frame of the clip when the page is entered in Reader mode.
• Auto-close
Automatically closes the clip when the page is exited in Reader mode.
• Update slider while media is playing
Specifies that the slider moves to display the progress of a playing clip.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 125


Popup Video 160x120, 240x180, 320x240
DHTML or NATIVE
Use the popup video player to show your video file in a window that appears after the user clicks the
popup video button. At Author level, you can move and resize the video frame.

To learn more about digital video, see the online Help topic, "About digital video files."

If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming media files.

Purpose
The purpose of the Popup Video media players is to provide you with media players which will play AVI files. The
playback mechanism for these 3 players utilizes the built-in media engine inside of ToolBook - the Clip System. This
Clip System functions on MCI standards and as such can only play media types for which MCI drivers are installed.
The key difference between the Popup Video media players and the Video Player media players is that this one has the
ability to keep itself hidden until you are ready to play the video.
These Popup Video media players are considered to be somewhat outdated and limited in functionality. If you are
interested in playing popup media files the recommended player is the Popup Universal Media Player.
Details
When you add this catalog object to your page, it comes in as two separate objects.
• One is a button with the caption of Popup Video. This is the object you want to select when accessing the
Extended Properties, in order to configure it.
• The other is the Popup Video Frame. The frame is used to define the area of the screen to be used to play your
media. You can move and resize the frame. The different between Popup Video 1, 2 and 3 is simply the default
size of the frame.

Each page can contain only one Popup Video Frame, and all Popup Video media players you add to your page
will utilize that same frame.

If you delete the frame, the video will play in the upper left corner of the monitor.

Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying a series of settings using the Extended Properties dialog.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 126


Popup Video 160x120, 240x180, 320x240

• Name
By default each new Video Player that you add to your book will have a name of "Popup Video (size)". It is a
good idea to rename this, giving it a unique name in the event you later need to programmatically refer to the
object using OpenScript or perhaps the Actions Editor.
• Clip To Play
Since the Video Player media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media
into the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox.
• Choose A Clip
If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is
imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above.
• Choose A File
Use this button to immediately import a file as a Clip. This is a quicker way than using the Choose A Clip
option.
• Play All Of Clip Before Continuing
If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue.
• Play Clip Continuously In Background
If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play
and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page.
• Start Clip When Entering The Page
If selected, the clip will start as soon as the user enters the page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 127


Video-Text Synchronizer
DHTML or NATIVE
Use this object to display text that is highlighted when the associated frame in a
video appears. If the user clicks on text in the synchronizer field when the video is
not playing, the text will be highlighted and the video will begin playing at the
associated frame.

Purpose
The Video Synchronizer object allows you to synchronize text with a playing video. (The video clip must be an .AVI
file.) A section of text is highlighted when the associated frame in a video appears. You define a section of text by
pressing CTRL+ENTER before each section in the synchronizer text field to insert a breakpoint and start a new line.
Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER to enter a breakpoint without starting a new line. Each section break is marked by a
special red symbol shown below between each paragraph.

Because the video clip must be an AVI, this object is not likely to be one you will want to use for DHTML export.
Streaming media forms such as RM or WMV are the best formats to use when your project will be exported to DHTML
and accessed from a Web Server. AVI files typically are not played from a Web Server because the entire AVI file will
have to be downloaded from the server and placed in the user's Browser Cache before the clip will even start to play, and
the amount of time needed to do this is normally considered to be unacceptable to your end users.
Details
When you add this Video-Text Synchronizer object to your page you will end up with just a field object. This field is the
Video-Text Synchronizer and has Extended Properties you can access to configure it.
Since this Video-Text Synchronizer is supposed to synchronize itself with a playing video file, a video player will also
be needed. This Video-Text Synchronizer will function with the Video Player 1, 2 or 3 media player.
General Tab
Configuring the Video-Text Synchronizer starts with identify the Video Player you wish to play.

• Name
By default each new Video-Text Synchronizer that you add to your book will have a name of "Video

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 128


Video Synchronizer

Synchronizer". It is a good idea to rename this, giving it a unique name in the event you later need to
programmatically refer to the object using OpenScript or perhaps the Actions Editor.
• Media Player
Each Video-Text Synchronizer needs to be associated with a Video Player. This combobox will list all Video
Players on the page, allowing you to choose one. Unfortunately the name of the video player is not displayed in
the combobox, but rather the Group ID number is. This is not very convenient, but it is functional.
• Color
This gives you control over which color is used to highlight the text in the field.
Options Tab
Configuring the Video-Text Synchronizer also requires identifying which frames of the video file correspond to the
various sections of your text field.

• Video Preview
To make setting up the Video-Text Synchronizer as easy as possible, a functional Video Player is present in the
Extended Properties. You can use the controls of the Video Preview Player to move throughout your video.
When you find a frame in the video that you want associated with a specific section of text, press the button
on the player and a new entry will appear in the sequence list located at the bottom of the Options Tab.
• Title
When you first open the Extended Properties for the Video-Text Synchronizer, the Sequence List will already
have one entry for each section that appears in your text field. The default Title is the first several words of the
section text, but you are free to change the Title of any of these, or leave the default values in place.
• Frame
The Frame is the frame number within the video file, which should be associated with the section text in the
field. You are free to modify the frame number as long as the value you specify is not equal to or greater than
the next section's frame number, and as long as the value is not equal to or less than the previous section's frame
number.
• Sequence List
The entire list of Titles and Frame numbers are shown in sequential order here.
• Clear
Allows you to remove an entry from the Sequence List. First select the entry in the Sequence List and then press
Clear.
• Jump To Frame
Allows you to move the Video Preview Player's video file to the correct frame position for the currently
selected Title. First select the entry in the Sequence List and then press Jump To Frame.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 129


Play Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use this button as an alternative to displaying the built-in play button on a media player.

Purpose
The various Media Players in the Catalog generally provide standard controls needed in order to Play, Stop or Pause your
media file, but sometimes you might find it useful to provide your own Play, Stop or Pause buttons, and not force the
user to use the standard ones.
For example, using the Universal Media Player you can choose to hide the media controls of an MPG file being played
back. Using the Play Media Player button you can control the MPG file but also you are free to make the Play Media
Player button look however you like and position it wherever you like on the screen.
Details
The only setting to configure with this catalog object is the media player to control.

• Select The Media Player To Play


The combobox will list all media players on the page allowing you to choose the one you want to control. You
can also use the red target symbol which has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target
symbol onto any media player object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the
correct media player reference.

130 Catalog Category: Media Players


Pause Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use this button as an alternative to displaying the built-in pause button on a media player.

Purpose
The various Media Players in the Catalog generally provide standard controls needed in order to Play, Stop or Pause your
media file, but sometimes you might find it useful to provide your own Play, Stop or Pause buttons, and not force the
user to use the standard ones.
For example, using the Universal Media Player you can choose to hide the media controls of an MPG file being played
back. Using the Pause Media Player button you can control the MPG file but also you are free to make the Pause Media
Player button look however you like and position it wherever you like on the screen.
Details
The only setting to configure with this catalog object is the media player to control.

• Select The Media Player To Pause


The combobox will list all media players on the page allowing you to choose the one you want to control. You
can also use the red target symbol which has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target
symbol onto any media player object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the
correct media player reference.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 131


Stop Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
You can use this button as an alternative to displaying the built-in pause button on a media player.

Purpose
The various Media Players in the Catalog generally provide standard controls needed in order to Play, Stop or Pause your
media file, but sometimes you might find it useful to provide your own Play, Stop or Pause buttons, and not force the
user to use the standard ones.
For example, using the Universal Media Player you can choose to hide the media controls of an MPG file being played
back. Using the Stop Media Player button you can control the MPG file but also you are free to make the Stop Media
Player button look however you like and position it wherever you like on the screen.
Details
The only setting to configure with this catalog object is the media player to control.

• Select The Media Player To Stop


The combobox will list all media players on the page allowing you to choose the one you want to control. You
can also use the red target symbol which has been added to the right of the combobox. You can drag this target
symbol onto any media player object on your page and the combobox will automatically be updated with the
correct media player reference.

132 Catalog Category: Media Players


Stop All Media
DHTML or NATIVE
Use this button to stop the play of all audio or video files. If a media player is displaying a graphic
image when the user clicks the Stop button, it will close the window that displays the graphic.

Purpose
At times you may want to stop all media which may be playing. This button, when clicked, will do just that.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 133


Streaming Popup-Player
DHTML or NATIVE
Use this button to display a media file. A streaming media file that has a file extension of .ra, .rm, or
.ram will open the RealSystem G2 Player. Each user must have the RealSystem G2 Player installed
on their computer in order to view your streaming media file. You can supply a link to the
RealNetworks download page by dragging the Get RealPlayer button from the Navigation Objects
category to your page.

Purpose
This Streaming Popup-Player object will allow you to point to an external Real Media file, and when the button is
clicked, it will RUN that file, causing the RealPlayer to open and play the file.
The file will not play within the ToolBook window, but rather will play in its own window. If you would like to play the
file within the ToolBook window, use the Universal Media Player instead.
Details
The only setting that needs to be configured for this Streaming Popup-Player is which file to play. When accessing the
Extended Properties for this object, you will be prompted to locate the file you wish to play.
NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your
media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import
so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another
machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.

134 Catalog Category: Media Players


Video Stage
DHTML or NATIVE
Use the stage object to display a digital video or graphic image. This object is used in conjunction
with a media player: clicking the media player button at Reader level displays your video or graphic in
the stage. If you plan to play digital video files over the Web, we recommend the use of streaming
media files.

Purpose
This Video Stage catalog object is useful in a limited capacity. Its purpose is to provide other objects with an appropriate
area on your screen to use when playing back a Clip. This object can be used in conjunction with Question Object media
feedback, as well as when using the Hotword media players or the Icon media players.
Question Objects
When configuring a Question Object's feedback you can choose to play a Media Clip. When specifying the media clip to
play, you can also specify a Stage to play the media in.

Hotword or Icon Media Player:


When configuring a Hotword media player or an Icon media player, you can use the Choose a Clip button in the
Extended Properties editor to choose which Clip you want to play. When choosing which Clip to play you can also
specify a Stage to play the media in. If you don't specify a stage the Clip will play in the upper left corner of the Monitor.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 135


Hotword 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
DHTML or NATIVE
A media player can play an audio file, a digital video file, or a single graphic image.
For example, you can play audio files with .wav or .mid extensions, and video files
with an .avi extensions. Other types of media files can be played if the proper software
drivers are installed on your computer.

Purpose
This Hotword media player will allow you to add a Hotword to a text field, which the user can then click to play a media
file.
There are 6 versions of the Hotword media player in the catalog and the only difference between them is the image
which gets inserted into the field. Functionally they behave identically.
Details
When you drag this object out of the catalog you have to drop it in a text field. If you drop it outside of a text field the
Catalog will generate an error informing you of this specific requirement.
If you drop it in a field, the catalog object will be inserted into your field as an in-line hotword image.
Extended Properties
When you access the Extended Properties of the hotword, you will be able to configure the hotword to play your media
clip.

• Name
This is the name of the Hotword. If you have several of these in a field or on a single page, you may consider
renaming each one so that they have a unique name.
• Clip To Play
Since the Hotword media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into
the Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox.
• Choose A Clip
If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is
imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above.
• Play All Of Clip Before Continuing
If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue.
• Play Clip Continuously In Background
If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play
and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page.

136 Catalog Category: Media Players


Hotword

• Start Clip When Entering The Page


If selected, the clip will start as soon as the user enters the page.
• Automatically Close The Clip When Leaving The Page
You may be thinking that a Clip must close itself when leaving the page, so what is this setting for, but if you
put the Player on the background, the clip will automatically continue to play as you leave a page, as long as the
page you are navigating to uses the same background. If you wish to prevent this behavior, turn this setting on.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 137


Icon 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
DHTML or NATIVE
A media player can play an audio file, a digital video file, or a single graphic image. For
example, you can play audio files with .wav or .mid extensions, and video files with an .avi
extension. Other types of media files can be played if the proper software drivers are installed
on your computer.

Purpose
This Icon media player will allow you to add a button to your page which the user can then click to play a media file.
There are 6 versions of the Icon media player in the catalog and the only difference between them is the Icon image
which is applied to the button. Functionally they behave identically.
Extended Properties
When you access the Extended Properties of the Icon media player, you will be able to configure it to play your media
clip.

• Name
This is the name of the media player. If you have several of these on your page you may consider renaming
each one so that they have a unique name.
• Clip To Play
Since the Icon media players use the Clip System to play media, you will need to import your media into the
Clip System after which you will be able to choose a clip from this combobox.
• Choose A Clip
If the file you want to play is not current imported into ToolBook as a Clip, click this button. Once the file is
imported as a Clip you will be able to choose that clip from the combobox above.
• Play All Of Clip Before Continuing
If selected, the entire clip will be played before the user can move to the next page or otherwise continue.
• Play Clip Continuously In Background
If selected the clip will play over and over again, which is handy if you have ambient music you want to play
and have it keep playing until the user leaves the page.
• Start Clip When Entering The Page
If selected, the clip will start as soon as the user enters the page.
• Automatically Close The Clip When Leaving The Page
You may be thinking that a Clip must close itself when leaving the page, so what is this setting for, but if you
put the Player on the background, the clip will automatically continue to play as you leave a page as long as the
page you are navigating to uses the same background. If you wish to prevent this behavior, turn this setting on.

138 Catalog Category: Media Players


NAVIGATION OBJECTS Catalog Category

This entire category contains lots of objects with predefined functionality that allow a user to move from page to page, or
even in some cases to another web site.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 139


Hotspots Graphic
DHTML or NATIVE
Use a Hotspots Graphic object to provide hot spots on a graphic that will be viewed in a Web
browser. When a user clicks a hot spot, the Web page referenced by the hot spot displays in the
browser. At Author level, the Hotspots Graphic object represents hot spots as shapes with dotted
outlines. You can match the shape of a hot spot to a particular feature of your graphic, for
example, a hot spot circle can be placed over part of a graphic that shows a coin. Double-click a
hot spot shape to select it and then resize or move it if necessary. You can add an additional
shape for a hot spot by dragging a draw object from the Catalog and dropping it on the Hotspots
Graphic object.

In older versions of ToolBook this object was known as the Image Map object but in ToolBook 8 was renamed to
Hotspots Graphic to help clarify the purpose of the object. When this object gets exported, technically it does get
converted into an Image Map HTML object - so the old name was appropriate - although perhaps not descriptive enough.
Hopefully the new name helps convey the intended use of this object.
Purpose
This object is intended to give you the ability to add navigation (hyperlink) abilities on an image by placing invisible
clickable regions on top of the image, where each region can provide navigation to another page.
Details
The Hotspots Graphic object is actually a group of objects. The group contains a button object, which is used to display
the graphic image you choose, and in addition various draw objects (circles, rectangles, polygons, etc) are placed on top
of the button image to be used as clickable regions.
Shown below is a Hotspots Graphic object configured to show a camera with 3 regions defined. The dashed line around
the regions is only visible while at Author level so that you can see and manipulate the regions. The dashed line will
disappear when in Reader level or when exported to DHTML.

By default, when you add a new Hotspots Graphic object to your page, it will have 3 clickable regions already in it. You
can delete any region you don't need and add others. Note that you have to have at least one region, it won't let you
delete a region if it is the only one left.
• To delete a region simply double click on it to select the region, and press your Delete key.
• To add a new region you simply need to add a new draw object into the group object. The easiest way to do this
would be to drag a Draw Object out of the catalog and drop it onto the Hotspots Graphic object. When you do
this the catalog will prompt you with the following dialog. You will want to select the option that says to Add
To Group.

140 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


Hotspots Graphic

General Tab
Configuring the Hotspots Graphic object requires setting up some basic behavior.

• Name
This is the name of the Hotspots Graphic group object. If you have several of these on your page you may
consider renaming each one so that they have a unique name.
• Auto Size
If checked, the image being displayed will appear at normal size, and you will not be able to resize the object. If
unchecked you are free to resize the image at Author level.
Options Tab
Configuring the Hotspots Graphic object requires identifying which image to display.

• Image
The image shown in a Hotspots Graphic object has to be a Bitmap Resource, so this option allows you to select
a Bitmap Resource from the list currently imported into ToolBook. If the image you are needing to show is not
currently a Bitmap Resource, you will be able to Import your image after clicking on the folder icon at the right
edge of this option.
• Hot Spots
All of the regions you define will be listed here, allowing quick access to the Hyperlink editor to set up your
various hyperlinks. Each region is listed showing the name of the region, and the page it will navigate to.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 141


Popup Index
DHTML or NATIVE
When a user clicks the Go to page button at Reader level, a list of the page names
in your book displays. Selecting the name of a page in the list causes navigation to
that page. The Go to page button can be hidden or placed off of the page if you
want the page list to show when the user right-clicks the page.

Purpose
This is one of two navigational controls in ToolBook which will permit you to show a list of pages (a menu of pages) to
the user and allow them to choose which page they want to navigate to, and have the navigation occur without the need
for any specialized code to be written. The other object is the Automatic Menu which operates similarly but has its own
set of behaviors.
Details
This object will list all pages in your book, in page number order, but will skip any page who's Skip Navigation property
is set to true. You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation property by using the Behavior tab of the Properties for Page
dialog as shown below.

Extended Properties
When you access the Extended Properties of the Popup Index, you will be able to configure some basic settings.

• Button Is Visible At Reader Level


If you don't want the button to be visible to the user, check this option. If it is not visible you will need to
provide some means of displaying the menu list. You can Trigger the button using the Actions Editor or an
Action Trigger to simulate the user clicking on the button, or you can enable the following option.
• Display Menu When Page Is Right-Clicked
This non-DHTML feature will allow the menu list to be displayed anytime the user right-clicks on the page.
The menu will be displayed at the location the user clicked.

142 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


Automatic Menu
DHTML or NATIVE
The automatic menu displays a list of the pages in the book as hyperlinks; a user can click on a
page name to navigate to that page. In the properties dialog box for the automatic menu, you
can select which pages to display.

Purpose
This is one of two navigational controls in ToolBook which will permit you to show a list of pages (a menu of pages) to
the user and allow them to choose which page they want to navigate to, and have the navigation occur without the need
for any specialized code to be written. The other object is the Popup Index which operates similarly.
General Tab
This object is quite a bit more flexible than the Popup Index is.

• Include all pages in the book


This is the default mode of a newly added Automatic Menu. All pages will be listed when this option is chosen.
• Include all pages in this page range
You can isolate the range of pages to be shown in the list by using this option. Use the Start Page and End Page
options to specify the starting and ending page, and those pages and all pages in-between will shown in the list.
• Include all pages in this background list
You can specify that only pages belonging to certain backgrounds be included in the list. Use the Add and
Remove buttons to build your desired background list.
• Only show named pages
This option permits you to control whether a page will be listed if the page has no name. Many times pages are
not named if they are considered pages users are not intended to see, perhaps pages containing data.
NOTE Regardless of which of the above options you choose, a page which has been configured for Skip Navigation
will be excluded from the list. You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation setting as shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 143


Kiosk Page Turner
DHTML or NATIVE
When a user selects this box, the page on display changes automatically after a set time
interval, such as ten seconds. Page navigation occurs after each time interval until the
button is clicked again.

Purpose
If you are building an informational kiosk type application which does not require any user interaction, you may consider
using this object. When checked, it will automatically flip through all of the pages of your book at a specific time
interval. The flipping will continue over and over until the checkbox is unchecked.
Details
To configure the number of seconds to delay between page flips, open the Extended Properties for the Kiosk Page
Turner.

The default caption of this object is 5 Sec. Auto-Turn Pages, but feel free to change the caption to whatever you like.

144 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


Glossary 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE
Navigate to the application's Glossary page or designated book.

Purpose
If you enable the glossary feature in ToolBook, normally the only way to get to the glossary is to click on a word in your
application - and have the glossary open up to show the definition of that word. These 4 Glossary buttons will open up
the Glossary and show the first entry without having to click on a look-up word.
To quickly summarize, a Glossary is series of pages where the name of each page matches the text of hotwords in your
book. For example if you want a Hotword with the text of apple in your application to open a glossary entry for the term
apple, then you need to have a page in your book named apple, and that apple page must have a background named
Glossary. Alternately you can place your glossary in a different book entirely. When creating the hotwords for your
terms do not place hyperlinks on them, just leave them as plain hotwords.
Details
These buttons functional identically, only their visual appearance is different. Also, they will only work if your book has
been configured to use a Glossary.
You can configure your book to use a glossary by enabling a few options in the Properties for Book dialog.

• Hotwords Link To Glossary Automatically


If checked, when a user clicks on a hotword, the glossary will open to the definition of the Hotword term.
• Clicking Text Looks Up In Glossary Automatically
This feature will permit you to click on any word even if it is not a hotword, and the word will be looked up in
the glossary. This feature does not work in DHTML.
• Glossary File Name
If you don't want to put the glossary pages in your current book you can specify the name of another book (in
the exact same directory as the current book) where the glossary terms are located. Typically an external
glossary book is named GLOSSARY.TBK but not is not mandatory.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 145


Jump To URL 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE
The Jump to URL object opens a specified Web page in a browser.

Purpose
Permits the navigate to a URL in the default browser.
Details
These two function only slightly different from each other.
• Jump To URL 1
This catalog object will permit the user to enter the URL of their choice and then press the GO button to
navigate there.
• Jump To URL 2
This catalog object will permit the user to choose a URL from a list of URLs already populated in the
combobox. When the selection is made, navigation will occur.

146 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


Navigation with Display
DHTML or NATIVE
Buttons on the navigation panel allow the user to move from one page to another.

Purpose
This navigation control will allow a user to more forward and backwards through your book using the arrows and will
also display to them the page they are on.
Details
This is a complex object, in that it does more than just tell you what page number you are on and what the total number
of pages in your book is.
It is very common to not want all pages in your project subject to being freely visited. Typically to control this, you mark
those special pages as Skip Navigation, and navigation bars will not navigate to them.
This object takes that into consideration when generating the current number and total number to be displayed in the
Page display box.
You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation property by using the Behavior tab of the Properties for Page dialog as shown
below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 147


Get ToolBook Neuron 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE
The Download Neuron button opens a Click2learn, Inc. web page that allows the user to download
Neuron. Using a Web browser and Neuron, a user can run a .tbk file created in ToolBook via the
Internet.

Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the Neuron download page on the
Click2learn web site.
http://home.click2learn.com/en/toolbook/neuron.asp

148 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


Get Flash
DHTML or NATIVE
This object contains a hyperlink to the Shockwave Flash download page on the Flash Web site. In
ToolBook, when the user clicks this graphic the hyperlinked page will launch in the user's default
browser. On an exported Web page, when the user clicks this graphic the browser will navigate to the
player download page.

Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the Flash Player download page on the
Macromedia web site.
http://www.macromedia.com/shockwave/download/

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 149


Get Media Player
DHTML or NATIVE
This object contains a hyperlink to the download page for the Windows Media Player. When a user clicks
this object, the download page will open in the user's default browser.

Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the Windows Media Player download
page on the Microsoft web site.
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/players.asp

150 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


Get RealPlayer
DHTML or NATIVE
This object contains a hyperlink to the RealPlayer download page on the RealNetworks Web site. In
ToolBook, when the user clicks this graphic the hyperlinked page will launch in the user's default
browser. On an exported Web page, when the user clicks this graphic the browser will navigate to the
player download page.

Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the RealPlayer download page on the
Real web site.
http://www.real.com/products/player/index.html

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 151


Get PowerPoint
DHTML or NATIVE
This object contains a hyperlink to the PowerPoint Viewer download page on the Microsoft Web site.
In ToolBook, when the user clicks this graphic the hyperlinked page will launch in the user's default
browser. On an exported Web page, when the user clicks this graphic the browser will navigate to
the download page.

Purpose
This is simply a button hyperlinked to the following URL which is the location of the PowerPoint download page on the
Microsoft web site.
http://office.microsoft.com/downloads/9798/ppview97.aspx

152 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


First/Last/Next/Previous Page, Back
DHTML or NATIVE
Use these buttons to allow the user to navigate to the first/last/next/previous page in your book.

Purpose
These 5 objects are just button objects with hyperlinks applied to them. You could easily create them yourself by
drawing a button and applying the appropriate type of hyperlink to the button.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 153


Navigation Panel 1 - 43
DHTML or NATIVE
Buttons on the navigation panel allow the user to move from one page to another. The panel
as a whole cannot be resized, but you can change the size or position of individual buttons. If
you want to change the size or position of an individual button in the panel, select it by double-
clicking on the button, and then resize or reposition the button.

Purpose
There are 43 various Navigation Panels in the catalog. Functionally they all work the same, the differences between them
are visual differences. Also you may find that some Navigation Panels don't have the same number of buttons available.
Details
You may think that a Navigation Panel is just a series of buttons with Hyperlinks attached to them, and nothing more,
but you would only be partially correct. In fact these Navigation Panels do have hyperlinks, but they also have additional
logic which permit the buttons to enable or disable themselves appropriately. For example, let's say you are at the last
page of your book. In this case you would likely not want the LAST button enabled or even the NEXT button enabled -
since they would effectively do nothing.
Choices
ToolBook ships with 43 different Navigation Panels in this category as shown below.

154 Catalog Category: Navigation Objects


PAGES Catalog Category

Looking for ideas for color schemes and navigation buttons to use in your latest project? You can look at the various
Templates that ship with ToolBook. You can even use one of the Specialists to create a shell of a book for you, which
have various Styles to choose from.
Or you can even choose from 31 different Pages which are provided in the Pages category of the catalog. Each one
contains a Backdrop and a navigational control bar that you can use in your own projects.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 155


All Pages
DHTML or NATIVE
Pages include a graphic and navigation buttons.

Purpose
The objects found in the Pages category offer a wide variety of pre-designed pages with Navigational controls built right
in. Using one of these saves you time by not having to graphically design an appealing page layout and navigation
controls.
Details
To use one, simply drag one onto your page.
There are 31 different Pages to choose from in this category as shown below:

156 Catalog Category: Pages


PLACEHOLDER OBJECTS Catalog Category

Placeholders that add Internet-specific features to a page when a book is exported for the Web, such as the ability to run
a book using Neuron, to play an animated GIF file, or to run a Java applet.
DHTML Mode View: Native Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 157


Animated GIF
DHTML ONLY
Use this placeholder to specify the name of an animated GIF file. The animated GIF file can be
viewed in a Web browser after your application has been published to DHTML.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Animated GIF file you configure in this object will not animate within Native
ToolBook. It will only animate in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
ToolBook does not have the built in ability to play an Animated GIF file, but a web browser can easily play an animated
GIF file. A way was needed to permit you to specify that for your DHTML export, you wanted an Animated GIF file
played at a specific location on your screen. This object fulfills that need.
In ToolBook you will only see the first Frame of the Animated GIF file, but once exported to DHTML, you will see the
entire play back when viewing in a browser.
Details
After adding a Animated GIF placeholder to your page, open the Extended Properties to configure the location of the
Animated GIF file you want to play.
NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your
media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import
so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another
machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.

158 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


Auto-Update Web Graphic
DHTML ONLY
Use the Auto Update Web Graphic placeholder to display a graphic file located on a Web server.
When your ToolBook II application is viewed in a browser, the graphic file will be downloaded and
displayed. This object supports GIF and JPEG graphic file formats.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Image file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native
ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
Normally when you export a project to DHTML, the images you end up seeing in the Browser are the same images you
put in your project to begin with. But what if you wanted a Banner Ad, or a some other image to occasionally change
from one image to another, all without having to re-export your content. This object provides that ability to you.
NOTE You will find that the Auto-Update Web Graphic object and the External URL Graphic object are nearly
identical. The Auto-Update Web Graphic object has the added ability to refresh each time the page is loaded,
whereas the External URL Graphic object does not.
Details
In order to make this work, you will need to place the image on a Web Server somewhere and then configure the
Extended Properties of the Auto-Update Web Graphic object to point to it.
You are then free to change that Image, or have someone else update it, and the next time the DHTML content is
accessed, the new image will appear instead of the old one.
Extended Properties

• URL of file to display


Type in the full URL of the image file you wish to display. This needs to be a .JPG or .GIF file.
• Refresh whenever the page is entered
If you want the image to be updated only once per session, don't check this box. If you want to ensure the image
is updated every time the user enters that page of your DHTML, check the box.
• Browse
If you don't know the exact address of the file, you can click the Browse button and a Browser will open. As
you navigate in the Browser the URL you are presently on will appear automatically filled out in the URL Of
File To Display field above.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 159


Auto-Update Web Field
DHTML or NATIVE
You can display the contents of a text file located on a Web server by specifying the location of the
file. When your ToolBook II application is viewed in a browser, the text file will be downloaded and
displayed. This object supports the plain text (TXT) file format.

To work in Netscape, the file extension for your text file must be .HTML. You can rename your text
file with this extension and the file will display properly in both Internet Explorer and Netscape.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Text file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook.
It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
Normally when you export a project to DHTML, the text you end up seeing in the Browser are the same text you put in
your project to begin with. But what if you wanted a Web Counter, or a some other text to occasionally change, all
without having to re-export your content.
This object provides that ability to you.
Details
In order to make this work, you will need to place the Text file on a Web Server somewhere and then configure the
Extended Properties of the Auto-Update Web Field object to point to it.
You are then free to change that text file, or have someone else update it, and the next time the DHTML content is
accessed, the new text will appear instead of the old text. Note that this also works in Native ToolBook.
Extended Properties

• URL of file to display


Type in the full URL of the text file you wish to display. This object supports the plain text (TXT) file format.
To work in Netscape, the file extension for your text file must be .HTML. You can rename your text file with
this extension and the file will display properly in both Internet Explorer and Netscape.
• Refresh whenever the page is entered
If you want the text to be updated only once per session, don't check this box. If you want to ensure the text is
updated every time the user enters that page of your DHTML, check the box.
• Browse
If you don't know the exact address of the file, you can click the Browse button and a Browser will open. As
you navigate in the Browser the URL you are presently on will appear automatically filled out in the URL Of
File To Display field above.

160 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


External URL Graphic
DHTML ONLY
Use this placeholder to reference one specific graphic file that exists on a Web server. For
example, if you know the graphic for the company logo is going to be replaced and you want to
automatically show the current logo on your Web page, you can use the image placeholder to
reference the logo graphic displayed on the home page for the company. The logo graphic on your
page automatically updates when the graphic file is replaced on the company Web site, as long as
the graphic file has the same name before and after the update.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Image file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native
ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
Normally when you export a project to DHTML, the images you end up seeing in the Browser are the same images you
put in your project to begin with. But what if you wanted a Banner Ad, or a some other image to occasionally change
from one image to another, all without having to re-export your content.
This object provides that ability to you.
NOTE You will find that the Auto-Update Web Graphic object and the External URL Graphic object are nearly
identical. The Auto-Update Web Graphic object has the added ability to refresh each time the page is loaded,
whereas the External URL Graphic object does not. This catalog object is considered obsolete, and using the
Auto-Update Web Graphic object is recommended.
Details
In order to make this work, you will need to place the image on a Web Server somewhere and then configure the
Extended Properties of the External URL Graphic object to point to it.
You are then free to change that Image, or have someone else update it, and the next time the DHTML content is
accessed, the new image will appear instead of the old one.
Extended Properties

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 161


File
DHTML ONLY
When you plan to export your application for the Web, you can use the file placeholder to specify a
media file that will be accessed through a Web browser. After your application is available on the
Web, a user viewing the application in a browser can play the file as long as the appropriate plug-
in or helper application is installed for the file type you specified.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the File you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook. It
will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
If you want to show 3rd party content inside of your DHTML content, this is the object to use. For example lets say you
have a Word Document you would like you users to be able to read. As long as the Word application or Word Viewer
program is installed on your clients machine, the file will be displayed within the bounds of the File placeholder which
you placed on the page.
This should work with virtually any file type, as long as the necessary Browser Plugin (or helper application) is installed
on the end users machine.
NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your
media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import
so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another
machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object only requires pointing to the File you wish to display.
NOTE The caption of the Extended Properties dialog incorrectly says Select The PowerPoint File, rather than just
Select A File. This is a known ToolBook bug which hopefully will be fixed soon.

162 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


Java
DHTML ONLY
This placeholder allows you to incorporate a Java applet in a ToolBook application that will be
exported to DHTML. For example, if you have an applet that displays text in a news tickertape
format, specify the name of the tickertape applet in the Properties dialog box.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the Java file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native ToolBook.
It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
If you want to implement a Java Applet into your Exported DHTML content, use the Java Placeholder to specify which
Java Applet and to configure the settings the Applet will need to function.
It is not possible to communicate with the Applet in order to changes its behavior once it has been exported. This may
limit the types of Applets you can use in ToolBook's DHTML.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying a number of settings.

• Name
Specify the name of the object.
• Java Class
Specify the name of the Java class file.
• Java Archive
Specify the name of the Java archive file that contains the applet, usually a file with a .zip or .jar extension.
• Parameters
Specify any parameters for the applet. Separate parameter/value pairs by commas.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 163


Neuron
DHTML ONLY
Use the Neuron placeholder to specify the name of a ToolBook .tbk file to display through a Web
browser. Neuron is a plug-in or ActiveX control included with ToolBook that allows a .tbk file to be
displayed in a Web browser. For more information about Neuron, open the Neuron Help file,
NEURON.HLP.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the ToolBook (Neuron) file you configure in this object will not be seen within
Native ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This is a strange object, perhaps not useful to a wide audience - but very powerful nonetheless. It permits you to show a
TBK file, running it through Neuron, within a page of your DHTML exported project. Technically you could probably
use the File placeholder to do this too, but this Neuron placeholder allows you to configure some very specific Neuron
related settings and parameters - a nice advantage over the File placeholder.
What would you use this for? Well I suppose the possibilities are endless but here is an example. Lets say you have
developed a functional calculator as a ToolBook application (don't laugh, I have done it - see my web site) and you want
to provide a calculator in your DHTML export of a Quiz, alongside a complex mathematical Question Object. The user
may need to use a calculator to figure out the proper answer and you can instruct them to open the Windows calculator or
you can provide it right in your DHTML export alongside the question. Well, by using the Neuron Placeholder you could
have it host the .TBK file that acts as the calculator. Simply position the Placeholder in an appropriate spot on your
screen next to the Question Object and configure it to point to your .TBK file.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying a number of settings.

• Name
Specify the name of the object.
• Book To Run
Specify the ToolBook file to be shown in the Placeholder.

164 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


Neuron

• Use Secure Mode


If selected, Secure mode will be used. In secure mode you can't do much. Question objects will likely fail to
function. Bottom line is that you should likely never choose this option. Consult the Neuron Help file for a full
explanation of what Secure Mode and Non Secure Mode are.
• Auto-size
If selected, the placeholder object will resize automatically to the size of the book.
• Use Custom Background Color
Select to use a custom background color. Sets the background color of the portion of the Neuron window that is
not occupied by the ToolBook window.
• Use Mat Color Of Application
Select to use the application's mat color as the background color. Sets the background color of the portion of the
Neuron window that is not occupied by the ToolBook window.
• Select Custom Color
Select to use a custom color. Sets the background color of the portion of the Neuron window that is not
occupied by the ToolBook window.
• Command Line
Specifies a custom command line that is used when ToolBook is launched. See EnterSystem in your Help file to
learn how to read the command line and access the parameters you passed in using this command line.
• Application Will Not Close When Hidden - Internet Explore Option Only
Specifies the actions that occur in the ToolBook instance when a Neuron control is hidden or shown—after the
control has initially been shown. A control may be hidden and shown in Internet Explorer, for example, when a
user navigates away from a browser page containing a Neuron control and then returns to that page.
• Close When Hidden, Restart When Shown - Internet Explore Option Only
Specifies the actions that occur in the ToolBook instance when a Neuron control is hidden or shown—after the
control has initially been shown. A control may be hidden and shown in Internet Explorer, for example, when a
user navigates away from a browser page containing a Neuron control and then returns to that page.
• Close When Hidden - Internet Explore Option Only
Specifies the actions that occur in the ToolBook instance when a Neuron control is hidden or shown—after the
control has initially been shown. A control may be hidden and shown in Internet Explorer, for example, when a
user navigates away from a browser page containing a Neuron control and then returns to that page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 165


PowerPoint 95
DHTML ONLY
Use this placeholder to display a Microsoft PowerPoint 95 presentation in your DHTML content.

Playback in a browser is accomplished using the Microsoft PowerPoint Animation plug-in


[axplayer.exe] freely available from Microsoft.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the PowerPoint file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native
ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This placeholder object will permit you to play back a PowerPoint file within a page of your DHTML exported project.
When playing back PowerPoint files in ToolBook under DHTML deployment, you have to choose between a
PowerPoint 95 and PowerPoint 97+ placeholder.
Because of a change Microsoft made in the playback engine for PowerPoint, it is not possible to offer one player. Your
best option is to use the PowerPoint 97+ placeholder and ensure your PowerPoint file (.ppt) was created with a version of
PowerPoint newer than version 95.
However if you have to use version 95 files, use this placeholder and instruct your uses that they will need to install
AXPLAYER.EXE which is freely available from Microsoft. Actually, if not already installed, the attempt to play one
should prompt the user to install the version 95 player.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the name of the PowerPoint file you wish to play.

166 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


PowerPoint 97+
DHTML ONLY
Use this placeholder to display a Microsoft PowerPoint 97 (or higher) presentation in your
DHTML content.

Playback in a browser is accomplished using the Microsoft PowerPoint Viewer plugin


[ppview97.exe] freely available from Microsoft.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the PowerPoint file you configure in this object will not be seen within Native
ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This placeholder object will permit you to play back a PowerPoint file within a page of your DHTML exported project.
When playing back PowerPoint files in ToolBook under DHTML deployment, you have to choose between a
PowerPoint 95 and PowerPoint 97+ placeholder.
Because of a change Microsoft made in the playback engine for PowerPoint, it is not possible to offer one player. Your
best option is to use the PowerPoint 97+ placeholder and ensure your PowerPoint file (.ppt) was created with a version of
PowerPoint newer than version 95.
If you use this placeholder you may need to instruct your uses that they will need to install PPVIEW97.EXE which is
freely available from Microsoft (or have PowerPoint 97 or higher installed). Actually, if not already installed, the attempt
to play one should prompt the user to install the version 97+ player.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the name of the PowerPoint file you wish to play.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 167


Reusable Graphic
DHTML or NATIVE
The Reusable Graphic placeholder will display a graphic image on any number of pages. It stores
the graphic file only once even though the graphic can be displayed multiple times throughout a
book, which reduces the overall file size of the book. If you export your application to DHTML, the
graphic displayed in the placeholder will be exported as a GIF or JPEG file.

Purpose
This placeholder is intended to be used when you want to use the same image in your project repeatedly and yet have
ToolBook utilize the same resource for each. This makes for a smaller (file size) ToolBook file as well as a DHTML
export which will load faster since the image is only stored once instead of multiple time.
Details
Technically, this object is just a Button object with a resource applied to it. You could easily accomplish the same thing
by just drawing a button and applying a Normal Graphic image...but this catalog object takes care of some extra little
features for you making it worth using.
My recommendation is that you utilize a Web Graphic placeholder instead of the Reusable Graphic placeholder
whenever possible.
General Tab
Configuring this object requires specifying a number of settings.

• Name
Although not mandatory, you can uniquely name each of your Reusable Graphic placeholders so you can tell
them apart by name alone.
• Auto Border
Toggles a border frame on and off when switching from Author and Reader level.
• Auto Size
When you assign a graphic the frame can automatically snap to the correct size if this checkbox is checked.
Note that this only works if you clear the Caption property of the Placeholder using the Properties for Button
dialog.

168 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


Reusable Graphic

Options Tab
Additional setting can be configured using the options tab.

• Image
Displays the currently chosen Bitmap Resource. Use the Choose button to select a resource.
• HTML Border Width
If you want the exported image to have a frame around it, specify the thickness of the frame using this setting.
• Output Format
This setting is supposed to control how the image gets exported, as a JPG or GIF, but it would appear that the
setting has no effect. The logic which is current used to determine if a Bitmap Resource is exported as a JPG or
GIF, is based on Color Depth and whether or not you have assigned a Chromakey value to the resource.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 169


Web Graphic
DHTML or NATIVE
Use the Web Graphic placeholder to display a GIF or JPEG file when you plan to export your
application to DHTML. Both GIF and JPEG files are in a format suitable for display on the Web.
When you use this placeholder, the graphic is not exported as a new file during the export
process, but rather the original file is copied to the export folder.

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the image you configure in this object will show up within Native ToolBook,
however the image you see is simply the image as it appeared when initially imported. If you later modify the external
file, ToolBook will not know you modified the external file and so the displayed image will not change.
Purpose
This placeholder is intended to be used when you want to use a JPG or GIF image in ToolBook and you plan to export to
DHTML, and additionally you want to ensure the export process utilizes the original JPG or GIF image that you asked
ToolBook to display.
Although this object shows up in the Native Catalog view, it really serves no useful purpose unless your intention is to
Export to DHTML.
Details
This object works sort of like a media clip, where the file you are interested in is not stored inside of the ToolBook file
but rather is stored externally. When using the Reusable Graphic placeholder on the other hand, the image is actually
pulled into the ToolBook file and the external image is no longer needed.
This Web Graphic placeholder will require the presence of the external file, exactly where you said it would be, when it
comes time to export to DHTML. If the file is no longer there, an error will be shown to you in the DHTML error log.
The external file is needed during the DHTML Export because the export engine will attempt to copy that file into the
Web Export folder.
My recommendation is that you utilize a Web Graphic placeholder whenever possible which will ensure your DHTML
images looks the best when displayed in a browser, because your original images are shown in the browser rather than a
new GIF or JPG that ToolBook created for you.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the external file you wish to display.
NOTE It is highly recommended that you create a Folder in your project folder and call it MEDIA. Place all of your
media files in this media folder before you configure any of your media players to point to them. This is import
so that you can later move your entire project folder to another location on your hard drive or even to another
machine, and you will not have to worry about forgetting to take your media files too.

170 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects


Web Page
DHTML ONLY
The Web Page Placeholder object will display the current contents of an HTML file located on a
Web server. When your ToolBook II application is exported to DHTML and viewed in a browser,
the specified file will be displayed within the bounds of the Web Page Placeholder.

When running in Internet Explorer, an HTML file with hyperlinks will correctly display linked pages
within the confines of the placeholder. In Netscape, using the Web Page Placeholder to display
an HTML page will display properly, however, clicking a hyperlink in the HTML page will cause
the termination of the ToolBook DHTML application because Netscape is unable to display the
linked page within the placeholder (the entire DHTML window navigates to the linked page).

WARNING: As a Placeholder object, the web page you configure in this object will not be seen within Native
ToolBook. It will only be seen in the Exported DHTML version of your project.
Purpose
This placeholder will allow you to specify an area on your exported DHTML page where you want another web page to
be displayed, permitting you to view a web page as a component of another web page.
If you want to show a web page within Native ToolBook (not exporting to DHTML) you will instead need to utilize the
Microsoft Internet Explorer ActiveX control.
Extended Properties
Configuring this object requires specifying the URL you wish to display.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 171


172 Catalog Category: Placeholder Objects
QUESTIONS (MULTIPLE CHOICE) Catalog Category

The Multiple Choice question objects provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the
actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. Using other objects in the Scoring and Tracking category you
can collect scoring information about your Question objects which you have placed in your book.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

NOTE Instructor user have a Question Summary option in the Tools menu which will permit you to generate a Text
file containing a complete answer key for all question objects in your book.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 173


Multiple Choice 1 - 66
DHTML or NATIVE
Multiple choice buttons allow the user to click a button to choose an answer. To display a question or
statement, drag a text field from the Catalog, drop it on the page, and then enter your text.
If you want to add an additional answer choice, select one answer button and choose Duplicate from
the Edit menu.

Purpose
The Multiple Choice question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the
actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer, but
you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
The functionality of Multiple Choice objects 1 - 66 are identical. Each come standard with 4 preconfigured buttons to
serve as the answers. The only real difference is the Graphics applied to the buttons.
Adding More Answers
If 4 answers are not enough for your needs, you can add more by selecting one of the answers and choosing Duplicate
from the Edit menu. This will create a new option. You will need to give the new answer a unique caption and reposition
it to an appropriate location on the screen.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need. If you remove
all but two, you might as well just use a True-False question instead.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Multiple Choice question object using the Extended Properties.
Let's start by using the following example.
Notice that the question text [What color is the sun?] and the Multiple Choice question object are not one and the same
object. The Multiple Choice question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object
and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Multiple Choice question object.

Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just button objects with Captions and Graphic Resources
assigned which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible
answers.

174 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 175


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button
(or field) that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in
your question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer
shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a
correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
This feature does NOT add more answer buttons to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 buttons
then read the Adding More Answer section above.

The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the
possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 buttons which are initially
configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but
you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3
incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect
responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is
appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3
incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for

176 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect
answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in
the set of displayed answers.

• Edit...
This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order.
• Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct
In the event your Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to
be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 177


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated.
If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5
pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts).

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth
only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter
25% and 75% for the two options.

Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with
a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total
percentage.

178 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 179


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the
Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do
not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the
question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect,
they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question.

Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong,
such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text.

The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot
Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their
final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message.

For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is
just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this
token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For
Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you
probably didn't know about.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which

180 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 181


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.

182 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice 1 - 66

• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 183


Definable Multiple
DHTML or NATIVE
A definable multiple choice question allows the user to simply click on an object to choose
an answer. You can define a graphic, a button, a field, or another type of object as an
answer. Place your answer objects on the page before following the steps available in the
Coach window.

Purpose
The Definable Multiple Choice question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You
present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1
answer, but you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties
dialog box.
Details
The basic functionality of the Definable Multiple Choice question object is essentially the same as the functionality of
Multiple Choice objects 1 - 66 objects.
The big difference between a standard Multiple Choice question object and this object is that you can choose to use Any
object on your page as an Answer. You are not limited to using buttons. For this reason the question object is not a group
of buttons - like the standard Multiple Choice question object. Instead it is a control object - as shown below:

This object is only seen at Author level - hiding itself at Reader level so the user does not see it. When you want to
configure the Definable Multiple Choice question object. You simply select it and then open the Extended Properties
dialog.
When a user clicks on one of the correct or incorrect answers which you have configured for this question object, a Blue-
Green dashed line will be drawn around the object to let the user know their selection was made. Unfortunately this color
is hard coded into the question object and there is no configurable setting that you can adjust to change that color.

Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Multiple Choice question object using the Extended
Properties. Let's start by using the following example which utilizes various polygons, a text field and a Definable
Multiple Choice question object.
Notice that the question text [Which of the following is an Octagon?] and the Definable Multiple Choice question object
are not one and the same object. The Definable Multiple Choice question object only deals with the Answer elements. In
my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Definable Multiple
Choice question object.

184 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Definable Multiple

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 185


Definable Multiple

entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answers tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. You will have one entry for each object that is in
your question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or
incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
Use this option to select a named object on your page to be used as an answer for this question. The object you
select can be a correct or incorrect answer.

186 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Definable Multiple

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct
In the event your Definable Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct answer, and
you want the user to be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 187


Definable Multiple

If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5
pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts).

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth
only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter
25% and 75% for the two options.

Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with
a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total
percentage.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

188 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Definable Multiple

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 189


Definable Multiple

• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.

190 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Definable Multiple

o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 191


Definable Multiple

• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

192 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice
DHTML or NATIVE
Multiple choice buttons allow the user to click a button to choose an answer. To display a
question or statement, drag a text field from the Catalog, drop it on the page, and then enter
your text.

If you want to add an additional answer choice, select one answer button and choose
Duplicate from the Edit menu.

Purpose
This Multiple Choice question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the
actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer, but
you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
Although this question, which by default is configured to look like a camera, looks completely different than a standard
Multiple Choice question object, it is actually identical to a standard Multiple Choice question object. The only real
difference is the Graphics applied to the buttons, and that the buttons are overlapping each other.
Below you will see that I have selected all 5 of the objects within this Multiple Choice question object. You can see that
there are 5 objects overlapping each other and that there are no captions applied to any of the buttons. The next image
shows the various buttons spread out so you can see that each button is just a piece of the whole image. This way each
button object can sense when you have clicked on a different part of the camera.

Of course, unlike a standard question object, this one takes more work to set up because you have to do some graphic
work in an Image Editing program.
Adding More Answers
If 5 answers is not enough for your needs, you can add more by selecting one of the answers and choosing Duplicate
from the Edit menu. This will create a new option. You will need to give the new answer an appropriate image and
reposition it to an appropriate location on the screen.
Removing Answers
If 5 answers is too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure any Multiple Choice question object using the Extended Properties.
Let's start by using the following example. Notice that the following example does not utilize the Camera object however
since the standard Multiple Choice question objects function identically to this catalog object, the example is still valid.
Notice that the question text [What color is the sun?] and the Multiple Choice question object are not one and the same
object. The Multiple Choice question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object
and placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the Multiple Choice question object.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 193


Multiple Choice

Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just button objects with Captions and Graphic Resources
assigned which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible
answers.

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

194 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 195


Multiple Choice

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button
that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your
question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer
shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a
correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
This feature does NOT add more answer buttons to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 buttons
then read the Adding More Answer section above.

The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the
possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 buttons which are initially
configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but
you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3
incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect
responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is
appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3
incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for
the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect
answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in
the set of displayed answers.

• Edit...
This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order.
• Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct
In the event your Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to
be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option.

196 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice

• Cannot Change Responses


If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated.
If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5
pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts).

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth
only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter
25% and 75% for the two options.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 197


Multiple Choice

Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with
a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total
percentage.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

198 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 199


Multiple Choice

• Feedback Text
This question is already configured with some appropriate feedback text for the answers.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.

200 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice

o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 201


Multiple Choice

• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

202 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice Fields
DHTML or NATIVE
Multiple choice fields allow the user to click a text field to choose an answer. To display an
instructional statement or question, drag a text field from the Catalog, drop it on the page,
and then enter your text.

If you want to add an additional answer choice, select one answer field and choose
Duplicate from the Edit menu.

Purpose
The Multiple Choice Fields question object provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present
the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices. By default, the user is permitted to choose only 1 answer,
but you can allow multiple correct answers by selecting Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct in the Properties dialog box.
Details
The basic functionality of the Multiple Choice Fields question object is essentially the same as the functionality of
Multiple Choice 1 - 66 objects.
The big difference between a standard Multiple Choice question object and this object is that the answers are displayed
in text fields instead of as button captions. The importance of this is that a button caption can't exceed a single line of
text, but a field can contain word-wrapped text.
When a user selects one of the answers the fillColor of the field turns Yellow to show the user that a selection has been
made, as shown below.

In fact the question object will insist that your fields have a fill color of White. If you attempt to change this fill color it
will reset back to white the next time the question is reset. It seems to have been designed to force the non selected
answers to be filled with white and the selected answers filled with yellow.
There is an undocumented way that Instructor users (sorry Assistant users) can take control of the two color values, and
it requires setting two properties of the question object. Displayed below is the Property Browser showing the 2 property
settings you need to adjust. The ColorChosen and ColorNotChosen. You can change these to any RGB value you like.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 203


Multiple Choice Fields

Adding More Answers


If 4 answers are not enough for your needs, you can add more by selecting one of the answer fields and choosing
Duplicate from the Edit menu. This will create a new answer. You will need to give the new answer a unique text entry
and reposition it to an appropriate location on the screen.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a this question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by
using the following example.
Notice that the question text [Which statement is not true?] and the question object are not one and the same object. The
question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text
in it - and placed the field above the question object.

Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just field objects which can be positioned in any manner you
like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible answers.

You can even change the Border Style of the fields to none if you don't want the border around the edge.

204 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice Fields

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 205


Multiple Choice Fields

Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each field
that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of fields in your
question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer
shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a
correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
This feature does NOT add more answer fields to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 fields
then read the Adding More Answer section above.

The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the
possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 fields which are initially
configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but
you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3
incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect
responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is
appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3
incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for
the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect
answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in
the set of displayed answers.

206 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice Fields

• Edit...
This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. The text you
place in the fields must be raw text. Any formatting (bold, italics, colored characters) will be removed in the
randomization process. If randomization is not used, then formatting can be used.
• Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct
In the event your Multiple Choice question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to
be able to select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 207


Multiple Choice Fields

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

Now, if you have 5 answers and 2 of them are correct and 3 are incorrect, things can become more complicated.
If you leave the Automatic checkbox turned on, then the 1st correct answer will be worth 50% of the 1 point (.5
pts) and the 2nd correct answer will also be worth 50% (.5 pts). The incorrect answers are worth 0% (0 pts).

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 75% of the answer and the 2nd correct one to be worth
only 25% of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter
25% and 75% for the two options.

Note that it is even possible to assign a negative weight to an incorrect answer. This is useful when dealing with
a Multiple Correct configured question and you want to ensure an incorrect response subtracts from the total
percentage.

208 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice Fields

• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 209


Multiple Choice Fields

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

210 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice Fields

• Feedback Text
By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the
Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do
not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the
question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect,
they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question.

Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong,
such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text.

The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot
Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their
final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message.

For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is
just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this
token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For
Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you
probably didn't know about.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 211


Multiple Choice Fields

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

212 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


Multiple Choice Fields

• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 213


Multiple Choice Fields

214 Catalog Category: Questions (Multiple Choice)


QUESTIONS (TRUE-FALSE) Catalog Category

The True-False question objects provides answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual
question in a field placed near the answer choices. Using other objects in the Scoring and Tracking category you can
collect scoring information about your Question objects which you have placed in your book.
Native and DHTML Mode View:

NOTE Instructor user have a Question Summary option in the Tools menu which will permit you to generate a Text
file containing a complete answer key for all question objects in your book.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 215


True-False 1 - 52
DHTML or NATIVE
The true/false question object contains two answer choices. To present a statement that users must
evaluate as true or false, position a text field near the answer choices and then type a statement in the
text field.

Purpose
The True-False question object provides two answer choices that allow a user to click a response. You present the actual
question in a field placed near the answer choices.
Details
The functionality of True-False 1 - 52 objects are identical. Each come standard with 2 preconfigured buttons to serve as
the answers. The only real difference is the Graphic applied to the buttons.
Note that the only real difference between a Multiple Choice question and a True-False question, is that a True-False
question has only two answers. You could actually take a Multiple Choice question object and remove all but two answer
and effectively have a True-False question.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a True-False question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the question text [The moon is made of cheese?] and the True-False question object are not one and the same
object. The True-False question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and
placed my question text in it - and placed the field above the True-False question object.

Feel free to rearrange the positions of the answers. They are just button objects with Captions and Graphic Resources
assigned which can be positioned in any manner you like. Stacked vertically is only one way to display your possible
answers.

216 Catalog Category: Questions (True-False)


True - False 1 - 52

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 217


True - False 1 - 52

• Answers
This area will list the 2 possible answers to the question.
• Edit...
This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.

• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.

218 Catalog Category: Questions (True-False)


True - False 1 - 52

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If your question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1
point, and the incorrect answer to be worth 0% of that 1 point. To ensure this is the applied behavior, ensure the
Automatic checkbox is checked and do not worry about this Score Weight option. This feature is kind of useless
for a True-False question. It makes much more sense for other question objects which have more than 2
answers.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where the correct response is worth 100% and the incorrect one is worth 0%.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 219


True - False 1 - 52

• Highest Possible Score


By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
Do not bother configuring these options as they will have no influence over the operation of the question object.
These settings should not appear in this dialog since they have no meaning to a True-False question...as it is not
possible to get a True-False question Partially correct.
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list both of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown
in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.

220 Catalog Category: Questions (True-False)


True - False 1 - 52

• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the
Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do
not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the
question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect,
they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question.

Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong,
such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text.

The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot
Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their
final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message.

For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is
just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this
token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For
Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you
probably didn't know about.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 221


True - False 1 - 52

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Response Is


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Since it is not possible to answer a True-False question and get it partially correct, this option is
pointless.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

222 Catalog Category: Questions (True-False)


True - False 1 - 52

• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 223


True - False 1 - 52

224 Catalog Category: Questions (True-False)


QUESTIONS (VARIOUS) Catalog Category

The question objects in this category provide answer choices that allow a user specify a response. You present the actual
question in a field placed near the answer choices. Using other objects in the Scoring and Tracking category you can
collect scoring information about your Question objects which you have placed in your book.
Native Mode View:

DHTML Mode View:

NOTE Instructor user have a Question Summary option in the Tools menu which will permit you to generate a Text
file containing a complete answer key for all question objects in your book.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 225


Definable Arrange 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE
An arrange objects question allows the user to move specified objects. At Reader level, the
anchor object appears in its correct location. The other defined objects automatically appear
in randomized locations.

The Colored Blocks is an example of a definable arrange objects question. You can specify
feedback for any answer by selecting the button labeled Colored Blocks, and then clicking
the Extended Properties button on the toolbar. In the Properties for Question dialog box,
click one of the Feedback tabs and define your feedback.

Purpose
The Definable Arrange question object allows the user to drag objects to their correct locations on the screen.
Although these two catalog objects may appear at first glance to be complete different question types, they are in fact
one and the same. The real difference between the two is that Definable Arrange 1 is not at all configured yet, and
Definable Arrange 2 is already configured with 4 dragable objects which look like a block puzzle.
The actual question object itself is just this button. This button is never seen by the user, as it is only shown when at
Author level.

Details
This is an interesting question type in that it allows a user to drag objects on the page, but it is peculiar in function in that
the starting position of the objects is an area of your screen designated to be the box that holds the objects - often piled
on top of each other.
This question can be thought of sort of like an old fashioned Jig Saw puzzle where typically you have a nice large area
where you put the puzzle together but the unplaced pieces are left in the box, all piled on top of each other.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Arrange question object using the Extended Properties.
Let's start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Assemble the following diagram.] and the Definable Arrange question object are not
one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field
above at the top of the page.

The image of the gears above is actually 6 separate Paint objects which had been imported into Toolbook. A graphic
utility program was used to slice the image into the 6 different elements so as to make a kind of puzzle to use with this

226 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Arrange 1, 2

question type. Below, you will see that I have spread out the objects a bit and selected them so that you can distinguish
between the different elements that make up the whole image.

The Randomization Box


Notice that there is a rectangular area on the right side of the screenshot above, which seems to be intended for the extra
pieces. Remember the Jig Saw puzzle comparison I made above. This rectangular area is intended to be used by the
question object as the box in which to randomly toss all the pieces. You are permitted to use any object on the screen you
like as the box (or container). In fact you can make your container object invisible so that no one can see it, but where the
question object can still determine an area to put the extra pieces.
When you switch to Reader level or access the content in a Runtime mode, the pieces will be tossed randomly into the
container area. Since the following is an often asked question, I'll answer it before you ask: No, it is not possible to
prevent the overlapping of the pieces in the container area.
One of the pieces is already in place because of a setting I have configured. Having at least one piece in place gives the
user a starting point in knowing where the rest should go. A piece that is configured to already be in place is called the
Anchor object.

NOTE You will likely want to ensure that the components of your question are near the top most layer of the screen.
You can set the layer position in the upper right corner of the Property editor for the individual pieces. If you set
the layer number too low you may end up with users dropping an object under another screen object and not
being able to pick it back up again.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 227


Definable Arrange 1, 2

Basic Use
The user can drag the pieces out of the box and try to place it in the correct position. The user can also re-drag an already
placed piece if they change their mind about the position.
Various options will permit you to control the functionality of this question object. For example you can choose to have
an incorrectly place piece be returned back to the box. You can have the pieces snap into place if the user drops it within
close proximity to the correct location. All of these options are covered in the configuration settings below.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Object In Which The Parts Will Be Randomized
This is the object (the box) in which you want the parts of your question randomly placed into. You are only
permitted to select a named object so ensure the object has some name. The bounds of the selected object will
used as the rectangular bounding area to put the pieces into.

Note that <none> is a valid option here. If selected the entire area of your page will be used as the box.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.

228 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Arrange 1, 2

o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the elements on the page are considered to be "parts" of the question,
which can be dragged and positioned by the user.

• Objects To Move
This area will list all of the possible parts to the question. The symbol next to each possible part shown in this
list defines if the part is an Anchor or not. An Anchor is a part which is intentionally left in its correct position
giving the user a point of reference to arrange the other pieces around. Click on the symbol to toggle between an
Anchor symbol and a blank symbol. If blank, the part will be included with the randomized pieces.
• Add...
Use this button to add more screen elements (parts) to the question object. You can only add parts that have
names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this. It is a good idea to name the parts with
unique names so you can tell if they are all properly included in the Objects To Move listing.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 229


Definable Arrange 1, 2

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Positioning Tolerance For Correct Placement
Users are unlikely to have the dexterity or patience to try to position your pieces in the correct position down to
the exact pixel. Because of this you can set a tolerance value so that even if the user is off by a little, they still
get it correct. By default the value is 16 pixels of tolerance. You can adjust this value if you want to fine tune
the tolerance.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Look For Multiple Objects With Same Name
This is a strange option. Here's how it works. Lets say that your puzzle contains lots of parts of which 3 look
identical. If they look identical, then the user will likely not know for sure where the 3 pieces go, since they
could be used interchangeably. To account for this odd scenario, if you name all 3 identical parts the same, and
if you enabled this option, ToolBook will permit the user to put any of the 3 pieces in any of the correct 3
locations and still count it as a correct answer. Talk about flexible!
• Snap Objects To Closest Defined Position
This setting works in conjunction with the Tolerance option listed above. If you would like the part to snap into
place if dropped within the tolerance range of a possible drop location, turn on this option. Users like this option
because if it snaps they know they at least dropped in a real position and not in between where two parts should
be located.
• Use Anchor Object
If you don't want to use an Anchor object at all and want all pieces randomly placed, you can enable this option.
If you have an anchor object already defined when you close the Extended Properties, it will no longer be an
Anchor object.
• Choose Anchor Randomly
If you don't care which one of the part is used as the anchor but do want one of them used, turn on this option
and ToolBook will randomly pick one of the parts to be the Anchor.
• Reject Incorrectly Placed Objects
If you want an incorrectly placed part to be returned to its original spot in the Container area, enable this option.
Leaving this option unchecked will result in the incorrectly placed object remaining where the user placed it.

230 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Arrange 1, 2

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 50% of the answer and the 5 remaining ones to be worth
only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually
enter 50% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 5 options.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 231


Definable Arrange 1, 2

great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response for:


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled. If enabled, you get to choose when feedback is given. The choices are:

232 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Arrange 1, 2

- When any object is dragged


- When an object is dragged to a Correct position
- When an object is dragged to an Incorrect position
- Never provide immediate feedback
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Select All Except Anchor
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field
with the exception of the Anchor objects. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once
instead of doing them one by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 233


Definable Arrange 1, 2

Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

234 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Arrange 1, 2

• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 235


Definable Drop
DHTML or NATIVE
With this question, the user chooses an answer by dragging an answer object to the drop target
object. You allow an object to act as the drop target by selecting it and clicking the Properties
button on the toolbar. On the Drag & Drop tab in the Properties dialog box, select Accepts
dropped objects.

To allow an answer object to be dragged at Reader level, select the object and click the
Properties button on the toolbar. In the Properties dialog box, click the Drag & Drop tab and
select the Can be dragged option.

Purpose
The Definable Drop question object allows the user to drag objects to their correct locations on the screen.
The actual question object itself is just this button. This button is never seen by the user, as it is only shown when at
Author level.

Details
This object is somewhat similar to the Definable Arrange question object type. The Definable Drop question allows you
to configure your question so that the user can drag objects onto a predefined 'drop area'.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Drop question object using the Extended Properties.
Let's start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Drag the Primary Colors from the Left Flip Chart to the Right Flip Chart.] and the
Definable Drop question object are not one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my
instructional text in it - and placed the field above at the top of the page.
The 6 dragable objects I chose to use in this example are field objects, as you can see on the left Flip Chart. To be used
as a possible answer to this question, the objects you decide to use must have a name. In this case I named each field
with the color each represents.

236 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Drop

The Drop Area


The Right Flip Chart should be used as the drop area for this question, the place where you want the answers dropped
onto. However it is unlikely you would want the answers to be dropped on the legs of the stand and be counted as
correct, so I have drawn a rectangle object on top of the Chart area of the graphic, so that I could specify that only this
rectangular area should be used as the drop area.
In the following image you will see the rectangle selected (note I reduced the size a bit so that you could see the
rectangle clearly). I have also selected the 6 fields representing the possible answers and the question object itself.

NOTE You will likely want to ensure that the components of your question are near the top most layer of the screen.
You can set the layer position in the upper right corner of the Property editor for the individual pieces. If you set
the layer number too low you may end up with users dropping an object under another screen object and not
being able to pick it back up again.

Basic Use
The user can drag an object (a color) from its initial position on the screen and drop it somewhere else on the screen,
hopefully in the correct area which is represented by the drop area object. The user can also re-drag an already dropped
piece if they change their mind about the position.
Turning on the Automatic Dragging Option
Virtually any object can be used as an answer. Once you decide what objects are the possible answers (both correct and
incorrect answers) to the question and have them positioned on the screen where you want them initially positioned, you
will need to enable the Automatic Dragging feature for those answer objects. This is done in the Property dialog for the
objects as shown below:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 237


Definable Drop

You will definitely want to choose the option "Can be dragged..." and it is highly advised that your turn on the Reset
checkbox - which will automatically fill in the position for you based on the current position of the object.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Object That Will Act As Drop Target
This is the object (the drop area) in which you want the answers of your question to be dragged into. You are
only permitted to select a named object so ensure the object has some name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the

238 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Drop

answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question,
which can be dragged and positioned by the user.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is an correct or incorrect.
• Add...
Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have
names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 239


Definable Drop

• Edit...
Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different object.
This is no different than using the Delete option and Add option to remove an answer and to add a new answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Allow Multiple Responses
If checked you can specify more than one object in your Answers list that are considered correct. If you don't
check this option you will not be able to specify more than one answer as being the correct answer.
• Reject Incorrect Answers
If you want an incorrectly placed answer to be returned to its original spot, enable this option. Leaving this
option unchecked will result in the incorrectly placed object remaining where the user dropped it.
• Snap Dropped Objects To Center Of Target
If you want the dropped object to be moved to the center of the Drop Area after the user drops it, assuming they
drop it somewhere within the bounds of the Drop Area, then enable this option. If you leave this option
disabled, the objects will simply stay where you drop them.

240 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Drop

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 50% of the answer and the 2 remaining correct ones to be
worth only 25% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and
manually enter 50% for the first correct answer and 25% for each of the remaining 2 correct answers.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 241


Definable Drop

great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.

242 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Drop

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 243


Definable Drop

use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to

244 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Drop

the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 245


Definable Match
DHTML or NATIVE
A match item question allows the user to drag an arrow from a source object to a target object.
For example, a user could press down the mouse button on a graphic and then drag the cursor
to a text field that displays a description of the graphic. Place your objects on the page before
following the steps available in the Coach window.

Purpose
The Definable Match question object allows the user to draw a red arrow between two objects on the screen to indicate a
correct answer.
The actual question object itself is just this button. This button is never seen by the user, as it is only shown when at
Author level.

An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Definable Match question object using the Extended Properties.
Let's start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Match the images to the definitions.] and the Definable Match question object are not
one and the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field
above at the top of the page.
The 5 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The 5 textual definitions are just 5 Field objects containing
the text definition of the food. To be used as a possible answers to this question, all 10 objects must have a unique name.
In this case I named each image with the name of the food (such as "banana") and I named the field objects in this
fashion "banana-text".

Basic Use
The user can drag an arrow from the food to the text definitions.
• This arrow is always red - unfortunately.
• The arrow tip will always snap to the center of the object it was matched to.
• The arrow tail will always snap to the center of the object being dragged from.

246 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Match

In DHTML, the arrow will not appear as a straight line, but rather as a series of stair stepped lines. This is unfortunately
the only way the browser can do this. Essentially Netscape cannot dynamically draw lines that are not vertical or
horizontal, so this stair step approach is the only way Netscape can do it. Internet Explorer on the other hand can draw a
diagonal line, but to keep the export consistent between browsers, it was determined necessary to force Internet Explorer
to also draw stair stepped lines too.

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 247


Definable Match

answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question,
which can be dragged and positioned by the user.

• Matching Object Name


This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Each line will show the Source object, an arrow
and then the correct matching object.
• Add...
Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have
names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.

248 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Match

• Edit...
Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different set of
matching objects.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Allow Multiple Responses To Matching Objects
Choose this option if you want to allow the user to draw more than one arrow to the same object. If this is not
enabled, a user is restricted to drawing only one arrow to a specific object. If an attempt is made to draw the
second arrow the first arrow drawn will disappear and permit the second arrow to remain.
• Reject Incorrect Answers
If you want the arrow to only remain on the screen when a correct match is made, choose this option. If you
leave this option unchecked, any arrow drawn will remain drawn on the screen even if the match was incorrect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 249


Definable Match

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the first answer to be worth 60% of the answer and the 4 remaining ones to be worth
only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually
enter 60% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 4 answers.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you

250 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Match

great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback When A Correct Match Is Made


You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 251


Definable Match

this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Select All
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field.
This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

252 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Definable Match

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 253


Definable Match

• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

254 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE
A drag objects question allows the user to match a text label with another object, such as a
graphic. The user drags the text label, and all target objects are stationary.

Purpose
The Drag Object question allows the user to drag the question object to a position on the screen where the arrow portion
of the question object is pointing at an appropriate answer.
The actual question object itself is just this button, which has a caption and a graphic assigned to it. You are free to
change the caption as well as the graphic too if you like.

There are 4 of these in the Catalog, and all behave the same, the only difference is the color of the arrow and the
direction the arrow is pointing.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Drag Object question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Match the term to the image.] and the Drag Object question object are not one and the
same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above at
the top of the page.
The 5 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The word PEAR along with the arrow is the Drag Object
itself.

Basic Use
The user can drag the word and arrow anywhere and drop it on any object on the screen.
• This arrow is just a graphic, you can switch it out to any image you like.
• The tip of the arrow must be in the target object to register as a match.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 255


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

• If the image is to the right of the caption, the upper right corner of the question object (in this case that would be
the same as the tip of the arrow) is the precise point that is used to determine if your match was made.
• If the image is to the left of the caption, the upper left corner of the question object (in this case that would be
the same as the tip of the arrow) is the precise point that is used to determine if your match was made.
• You can put several Drag Object questions on your screen so that you can have more than one item to match. In
my example if I wanted the user to identify all 5 foods, I would need 5 Drag Object questions on the page.

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.

256 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be the possible answers to the
question.

• Possible Target Objects


This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. It is likely that only one object on the page is
considered the right answer but in some cases the right answer could be one of many objects on the page.
• Add...
Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 257


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.

• Edit...
Use this button to edit your answer choice.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Reject Unrecognized Answers
If you want the arrow to return to its initial position if the user drops it in the wrong location, enable this option.
• Snap To Center Of Target
If you want the arrow tip to snap to the center of the target area if dropped on a recognized object, enable this
option. A recognized object is essentially any object you have listed in the Possible Target Objects list - whether
it is currently configured as a correct or incorrect object.

258 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you configured two correct placed to drop this object, and one was 'more' correct than the other. In
this case perhaps you want to ensure that the more correct answer is a full 100% of the 1 point, and the less
correct answer is worth only 80% of that 1 point. In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic
checkbox and manually enter 100% for the first correct target and 80% for the other correct target.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 259


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox.

260 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Select All
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field.
This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 261


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

262 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Object 1, 2, 3, 4

• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 263


Drag Text
NATIVE ONLY
This object allows you to define an ordered list of words or phrases as the correct response to a
question and test the user's ability to reconstruct the list in proper order. The user answers the
question by dragging the phrases to the correct position.

The lines of text are displayed in a random order when the object is reset. You specify when a
question will be reset on the General tab of the Properties dialog box.

Purpose
The Drag Text question allows the user to rearrange lines of text in a field by dragging lines up or down in the list. This
object does not work in DHTML and therefore can be used only for Natively distributed applications.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Drag Text question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Organize the events in date order] and the Drag Text question object are not one and
the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above
at the top of the page.

Basic Use
The user can drag the textlines up and down in the list to change the order that the lines are listed.
• Feel free to change the color, font size, etc. of the question object to fit your needs.
• The text for each entry is limited to a single line - which cannot word wrap.
• In Reader mode the text lines will be displayed to the user in a random order.
• In Author mode the text lines will be displayed to you in the correct order.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

264 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Text

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 265


Drag Text

Answers Tab

• Text To Be Ordered
This area will list all of the answers to the question. If you want to control the formatting of the text in the field
(such as font size, color), do so by selecting the Field object in the Drag Text object and then use the Properties
for Field settings to set the font characteristics. It is not possible to format the text on a character by character
basis.

In my example above I used a hyphen character at the beginning of the lines to help the user see that they are
different entries. You can use this too, or perhaps a bullet character (press ALT-0149) will do nicely - don't
worry that it shows in the editor as a vertical bar character.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

266 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Text

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Text To Be Ordered
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Each Element In Correct Position
This value is computed automatically and cannot be changed. It is essentially the value achieved when you take
100 and divide it by the number of text lines in your question.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
This question object behaves much different than other question objects. For the Immediate Feedback there really isn't
anything to configure because the question does not really support Immediate Feedback. You do have the opportunity to
Enable Delayed Feedback however, after each move.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 267


Drag Text

• Enable Feedback After Each Move


You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to trigger Delayed Feedback after each move. For this
question type there is no real concept of Immediate Feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

268 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drag Text

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 269


Drag Text

o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

270 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE
A drop target object displays a graphic to visually show the user where to
drop an answer or multiple answers. The user chooses an answer by
dragging an answer object to the drop target object.

To allow an answer object to be dragged at Reader level, select the object at


Author level and click the Properties button on the toolbar. In the Properties
dialog box click the Drag & Drop tab and select the Can be dragged option.

Purpose
The Drop Target question object allows the user to drag objects to a drop target and drop them.
As you can see this question object comes in 4 versions, all identical in function but each having a different Target
image. The actual question object itself is the image.

You may be thinking, "Hey, isn't this just another form of a Definable Drop question?" And you would be right. The
advantage to using these Drop Targets is that they already have nice images to use as a drop area. You will find that
either of the question types may suite your needs equally well.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Drop Target question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Put all of the Bananas in the box] and the Drop Target question object are not one and
the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above
at the top of the page.
The 9 dragable food objects I chose to use in this example are Paint objects. To be used as a possible answer to this
question, the objects you decide to use must have a name. In this case I named each to be the actual name of the food
item. Since I have two of each, I named the 2nd of each with a "2" on the end of the name ("banana" and "banana2").

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 271


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

The Drop Area


The box will be used as the drop area for this question, the place where you want the answers dropped onto.
NOTE You will likely want to ensure that the components of your question are near the top most layer of the screen.
You can set the layer position in the upper right corner of the Property editor for the individual pieces. If you set
the layer number too low you may end up with users dropping an object under another screen object and not
being able to pick it back up again. You will also likely want to have the Drop Target object be on the TOP
most layer of the screen so that when an object is dropped onto the box, that the object will appear behind (and
thus hidden) the box, making it appear to the user like the object must have gone into the box.

Basic Use
The user can drag an object (a food item) from its initial position on the screen and drop it somewhere else on the screen,
hopefully in the correct area which is represented by the Drop Target object. The user can also re-drag an already
dropped item if they change their mind about the position.

Turning on the Automatic Dragging Option


Virtually any object can be used as an answer. Once you decide what objects are the possible answers (both correct and
incorrect answers) to the question and have them positioned on the screen where you want them initially positioned, you
will need to enable the Automatic Dragging feature for those answer objects. This is done in the Property dialog for the
object as shown below:

272 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

You will definitely want to choose the option "Can be dragged..." and it is highly advised that your turn on the Reset
checkbox - which will automatically fill in the position for you based on the current position of the object.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Object That Will Act As Drop Target
Normally this is set to <self> which means "use the question object itself as the target". You can also select any
other Named object which is a part of the Question object group. By default there will be two objects already
defined for you to choose from.
o Button "Drop Target - which is the button object which is displaying the image (the box for example).
Using this setting would typically end up with the same results as choosing <self>.
o Ellipse "Top" - which is set to transparent and no border making it hard to see but it is there. This can
be used to help focus the drop area to a specific spot rather than using the whole image. For example
you could use the ellipse and ensure that it is small and positioned to cover just the Bulls Eye portion
of the Archery target.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 273


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question,
which can be dragged and positioned by the user.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers (correct or incorrect) to the question. The symbol next to each
possible answer shown in this list defines if the answer is an correct or incorrect. In my example I will let the
<Anything else> option cover all of my incorrect responses rather than adding them to the list.

• Add...
Use this button to add more screen objects (answers) to the question object. You can only add answers that have
names, so ensure you name your objects before you try to configure this.

274 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

• Edit...
Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different object.
This is no different than using the Delete option and Add option to remove an answer and to add a new answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Allow Multiple Responses
If checked you can specify more than one object in your Answers list that are considered correct. If you don't
check this option you will not be able to specify more than one answer as being the correct answer.
• Reject Incorrect Answers
If you want an incorrectly placed answer to be returned to its original spot, enable this option. Leaving this
option unchecked will result in the incorrectly placed object remaining where the user dropped it.
• Snap Dropped Objects To Center Of Target
If you want the dropped object to be moved to the center of the Drop Area after the user drops it, assuming they
drop it somewhere within the bounds of the Drop Area, then enable this option. If you leave this option
disabled, the objects will simply stay where you drop them.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 275


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 50% of the answer and the 2 remaining correct ones to be
worth only 25% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and
manually enter 50% for the first correct answer and 25% for each of the remaining 2 correct answers.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you

276 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 277


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,

278 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 279


Drop Target 1, 2, 3, 4

the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

280 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE
The fill-in-the-blank question object contains one answer field. To present a statement or question
that users must evaluate before answering, position a text field near the answer field and then type a
statement or question in the text field.

Purpose
The Fill In The Blank (FIB) question object provides an editable field in which a user can type a response into.
Details
The functionality of the Fill In The Blank 1 and Fill In The Blank 2 are the same. One is configured to permit a single
line of text and the other will accept multiple lines of word wrapped text.
General Behavior
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Fill In The Blank question object using the Extended Properties.
Let's start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Enter the name for this US Currency.] and the Fill In The Blank question object are not
one and the same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object
and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above the question object.

• The Fill In The Blank question object will permit you to specify one or more possible correct answers.
• The answers can be single or multi-word answers.
• Pressing Tab or Enter or clicking elsewhere on the screen will cause the question to process the answer.
General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 281


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

282 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
Allows you to add a new potential correct or incorrect answer.

o Match Text
This it the typical setting and ONLY setting supported under DHTML. It indicates that you wish to
match the text entered by the use to text you have preconfigured.
o OpenScript Expression
This non-DHTML setting allows you to indicated that you wish to use programming logic to determine
if the response is correct. If you choose this option the Response Text field turns into a Answer
Definition field to permit you to enter an appropriate OpenScript expression.
o Response Text
One or more words which represent an incorrect or a correct answer to the question.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 283


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

o Answer Definition
An OpenScript statement which will evaluate to True or False. If it evaluates to True, the answer is
considered correct. If the it evaluates to False, the answer is considered incorrect. The value the user
typed in can be reference by using the term IT.

Example OpenScript Expression:


IT contains "Dollar"[this would permit the user to type "A Dollar Bill" or "The Dollar", etc.
o Match Case
Permits you to specify that each character of the answer must be properly upper or lowercased in order
to be considered a match.
o Match Word Order
If your answer is comprised of multiple words, word order may be important. If the order of the words
in the users response is important then check this option.
o Confirm if Recognized
If the user types in an answer that is considered a match only because one of the above options (such as
Word Order) was configured to allow the answer to be considered a positive match, you can enable
this setting. The user will see a prompt asking if their answer is really a match to one of your answers,
such as in this dialog:

o Enable "Sounds Like"


One of the problems with a Fill In The Blank question is that spelling counts. If the user misspells the
answer, they are liable to get it wrong. ToolBook therefore incorporates a Sounds Like option which
allows certain letter combinations to be incorrect but still consider their response to be a positive
match.

For example if a valid response can be PHONE, the user can type in FONE and get it correct, because
both sound the same when pronounced.
o Ignore Punctuation
If this option is enabled, all punctuation characters in the response are ignored when attempting to
match the users response.
o Confirm By Asking If The User Meant
This option is directly tied to the Confirm if Recognized option above.
• Edit...
This option allows you to change the configuration options for the list of possible answers.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.

284 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

• Cannot Change Responses


This will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they type in an answer and do anything to commit their
answer (essentially anything that would move focus out of the field), and then attempt to re-answer it...they will
be told that the question is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want any correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
any incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 100% of the answer and the 2nd correct one [because
"buck" is slang for "dollar" so should not be worth as much] to be worth only 90% of the answer? In this case
you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 100% and 90% for the two options.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 285


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Immediate Feedback is triggered anytime the user types their answer and then presses Tab, Enter or clicks elsewhere on
the screen to move focus out of the Field.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in

286 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the
Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do
not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the
question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect,
they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question.

Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong,
such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text.

The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot
Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their
final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message.

For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is
just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this
token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For
Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you
probably didn't know about.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 287


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.

288 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 289


Fill In The Blank 1, 2

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

290 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank Hotword
DHTML or NATIVE
You use the hotword fill-in-the-blank object to insert an underlined answer area in a pre-
existing text field. The student clicks the underlined area to enter an answer, and the
surrounding text is not modified.

Purpose
The Fill In The Blank Hotword question object provides an editable underline in which a user can type a response into,
after clicking on that underline to reveal an entry box.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Fill In The Blank Hotword question object using the Extended
Properties. Let's start by using the following example.
Notice that the informational text [US Currency] and the Fill In The Blank Hotword question object are not one and the
same object. The question object only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed
my question text in it - and placed the field above the question object.

• The Fill In The Blank Hotword question object will permit you to specify one or more possible correct answers.
• The answers can be single or multi-word answers.
• Click the underline to allow typing of a response. The response will be inserted into the sentence, once entered.
• Pressing Tab or Enter or clicking elsewhere on the screen will cause the question to process the answer.
Getting It Out Of The Catalog
This object is a Hotword and a hotword can only exist inside of a field or a recordfield. In order to add one to your page
from the catalog:
• First configure your field so that it is ready to receive the underline.
• Drag the object out of the catalog and position the tip of the cursor in the field where you want the line to
appear.
• Release the mouse to insert the hotword into the field.
• To access the Extended Properties for this catalog object, click on the hotword so that the I-Beam is blinking
somewhere in the underline. At this point you can access the Properties for Fill In The Blank question from the
Object menu.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 291


Fill In The Blank Hotword

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Number Of Spaces For Answer
Determines the length of the underline, which represents the actual question object.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:

292 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank Hotword

o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 293


Fill In The Blank Hotword

• Add...
Allows you to add a new potential correct or incorrect answer.

o Match Text
This it the typical setting and ONLY setting supported under DHTML. It indicates that you wish to
match the text entered by the use to text you have preconfigured.
o OpenScript Expression
This non-DHTML setting allows you to indicated that you wish to use programming logic to determine
if the response is correct. If you choose this option the Response Text field turns into a Answer
Definition field to permit you to enter an appropriate OpenScript expression.
o Response Text
One or more words which represent an incorrect or a correct answer to the question.
o Answer Definition
An OpenScript statement which will evaluate to True or False. If it evaluates to True, the answer is
considered correct. If the it evaluates to False, the answer is considered incorrect. The value the user
typed in can be reference by using the term IT.

Example OpenScript Expression:


IT contains "Dollar"[this would permit the user to type "A Dollar Bill" or "The Dollar", etc.
o Match Case
Permits you to specify that each character of the answer must be properly upper or lowercased in order
to be considered a match.
o Match Word Order
If your answer is comprised of multiple words, word order may be important. If the order of the words
in the users response is important then check this option.
o Confirm if Recognized
If the user types in an answer that is considered a match only because one of the above options (such as
Word Order) was configured to allow the answer to be considered a positive match, you can enable
this setting. The user will see a prompt asking if their answer is really a match to one of your answers,
such as in this dialog:

o Enable "Sounds Like"


One of the problems with a Fill In The Blank question is that spelling counts. If the user misspells the
answer, they are liable to get it wrong. ToolBook therefore incorporates a Sounds Like option which
allows certain letter combinations to be incorrect but still consider their response to be a positive
match.

294 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank Hotword

For example if a valid response can be PHONE, the user can type in FONE and get it correct, because
both sound the same when pronounced.
o Ignore Punctuation
If this option is enabled, all punctuation characters in the response are ignored when attempting to
match the users response.
o Confirm By Asking If The User Meant
This option is directly tied to the Confirm if Recognized option above.
• Edit...
This option allows you to change the configuration options for the list of possible answers.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
This will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they type in an answer and do anything to commit their
answer (essentially anything that would move focus out of the field), and then attempt to re-answer it...they will
be told that the question is locked.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 295


Fill In The Blank Hotword

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want any correct response to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
any incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the 1st correct one to be worth 100% of the answer and the 2nd correct one [because
"buck" is slang for "dollar" so should not be worth as much] to be worth only 90% of the answer? In this case
you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually enter 100% and 90% for the two options.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers

296 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank Hotword

Immediate Feedback Tab


The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Immediate Feedback is triggered anytime the user types their answer and then presses Tab, Enter or clicks elsewhere on
the screen to move focus out of the Field.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 297


Fill In The Blank Hotword

o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for incorrect answers is <incorrect>. In my opinion this is a mistake - and only the
Delayed Feedback should be configured with <incorrect>. The reason for my opinion is that normally you do
not want to tell the user if they are correct or incorrect as they click possible answers on a question, because the
question is technically not Attempted until the you Score the question. So if you tell them they are incorrect,
they will likely just keep clicking until they get a response of Correct, and then move to the next question.

Perhaps instead you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong,
such as "Are you sure?" Of course you can change the text response to display nothing by deleting the text.

The one time where I think it is appropriate to have this configured as <incorrect> is if you have the Cannot
Change Responses option enabled in the Answers tab. In that event you are assured that their choice is their
final answer, and they will not be able to change their mind based on your feedback message.

For those of you asking "What exactly does <incorrect> mean?", good question. This is a token value which is
just a placeholder for the real "incorrect" message. You can configure exactly what ToolBook uses for this
token by using the Generic Runtime System Prompts... button on the Behavior Tab of the Properties For
Lesson dialog. The token for <correct> is also listed in there along with dozens of other messages you
probably didn't know about.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is

298 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Fill In The Blank Hotword

likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 299


Fill In The Blank Hotword

• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

300 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 1
DHTML or NATIVE
Match item fields allow the user to drag an arrow from an answer field to an object on the page,
such as a graphic. Place your target objects on the page before following the steps available in
the Coach window.

Purpose
The Match Item 1 question is a combination of the Definable Match and Multiple Choice Field objects.
Not only does it utilize fields like the Multiple Choice Field question object, which turn yellow when you click on them,
it also allows you to draw a red arrow from one of the fields to another object on the page - just like the Definable Match
question object does.
Adding More Answers
If 4 answers are not enough for your needs, you can add more by selecting one of the answers and choosing Duplicate
from the Edit menu. This will create a new option.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Match Item 1 question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Match the terms to their images.] and the Match Item 1 question object are not one and
the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above
at the top of the page.
The 4 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The 4 textual definitions are actually the components of
the question object.

When a user selects one of the answers the fillColor of the field turns Yellow to show the user that a selection has been
made and the red arrow begins to draw. As soon as the user releases the mouse the field will revert back to white.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 301


Match Item 1

In fact the question object will insist that your fields have a fillColor of White. If you attempt to change this fill color it
will reset back to white the next time the question is reset. It seems to have been designed to force the non selected
answers to be filled with white and the selected answers filled with yellow.
There is an undocumented way that Instructor users (sorry Assistant users) can take control of the two color values, and
it requires setting two properties of the question object - the same two properties that affect the Multiple Choice Field
object. Displayed below is the Property Browser showing the 2 property settings you need to adjust. The ColorChosen
and ColorNotChosen. You can change these to any RGB value you like.

Basic Use
The user can drag an arrow from the Fields objects to the images.
• This arrow is always red - unfortunately.
• The arrow tip will always snap to the center of the object it was matched to.
• The arrow tail will always snap to the center of the side of the field being dragged from.
In DHTML, the arrow will not appear as a straight line, but rather as a series of stair stepped lines. This is unfortunately
the only way the browser can do this. Essentially Netscape cannot dynamically draw lines that are not vertical or
horizontal, so this stair step approach is the only way Netscape can do it. Internet Explorer on the other hand can draw a
diagonal line, but to keep the export consistent between browsers, it was determined necessary to force Internet Explorer
to also draw stair stepped lines too.

302 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 1

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 303


Match Item 1

Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Each line will show the Text of the field object,
plus an arrow and then the name of the correct matching object.
• Edit...
Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different set of
matching objects.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order.
• Allow Multiple Responses To Matching Objects
Choose this option if you want to allow the user to draw more than one arrow to the same object. If this is not
enabled, a user is restricted to drawing only one arrow to a specific object. If an attempt is made to draw the
second arrow, the first arrow drawn will disappear and permit the second arrow to remain.

304 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 1

• Reject Incorrect Answers or Unrecognized Objects


If you want the arrow to only remain on the screen when a correct match is made, choose this option. If you
leave this option unchecked, any arrow drawn will remain drawn on the screen even if the match was incorrect.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the first answer to be worth 70% of the answer and the 3 remaining ones to be worth
only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually
enter 70% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 4 answers.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 305


Match Item 1

• Lowest Possible Score


Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback When A Correct Match Is Made


You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox.

306 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 1

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Select All
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field.
This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 307


Match Item 1

Delayed Feedback Tab


The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.

308 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 1

• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 309


Match Item 2
DHTML or NATIVE
A match item question allows the user to drag an arrow from an answer choice to an object such
as a text field that displays a matching phrase.

Purpose
The Match Item 2 question is a combination of the Definable Match and Multiple Choice objects.
Not only does it utilize buttons like the Multiple Choice question object, it also allows you to draw a red arrow from one
of the fields to another object on the page - just like the Definable Match question object does.
Adding More Answers
If 4 answers are not enough for your needs, you can add more by selecting one of the answers and choosing Duplicate
from the Edit menu. This will create a new option.
Removing Answers
If 4 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Match Item 2 question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Match the terms to their images.] and the Match Item 2 question object are not one and
the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above
at the top of the page.
The 4 images of food are Paint objects pasted into ToolBook. The 4 textual definitions are actually the components of
the question object.

Basic Use
The user can drag an arrow from the Button objects to the images.
• This arrow is always red - unfortunately.
• The arrow tip will always snap to the center of the object it was matched to.
• The arrow tail will always snap to the center of the side of the button being dragged from.

310 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 2

In DHTML, the arrow will not appear as a straight line, but rather as a series of stair stepped lines. This is unfortunately
the only way the browser can do this. Essentially Netscape cannot dynamically draw lines that are not vertical or
horizontal, so this stair step approach is the only way Netscape can do it. Internet Explorer on the other hand can draw a
diagonal line, but to keep the export consistent between browsers, it was determined necessary to force Internet Explorer
to also draw stair stepped lines too.

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 311


Match Item 2

• Automatically Reset Question


When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be answers of the question.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Each line will show the Text of the field object,
plus an arrow and then the name of the correct matching object.
• Edit...
Use this button to edit your answer choice. This allows you to change your mind, choosing a different set of
matching objects.

312 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 2

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order.
• Allow Multiple Responses To Matching Objects
Choose this option if you want to allow the user to draw more than one arrow to the same object. If this is not
enabled, a user is restricted to drawing only one arrow to a specific object. If an attempt is made to draw the
second arrow the first arrow drawn will disappear and permit the second arrow to remain.
• Reject Incorrect Answers or Unrecognized Objects
If you want the arrow to only remain on the screen when a correct match is made, choose this option. If you
leave this option unchecked, any arrow drawn will remain drawn on the screen even if the match was incorrect.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 313


Match Item 2

specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

But what if you wanted the first answer to be worth 70% of the answer and the 3 remaining ones to be worth
only 10% (each) of the answer? In this case you will want to turn OFF the Automatic checkbox and manually
enter 70% for the first answer and 10% for each of the remaining 4 answers.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers

314 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 2

Immediate Feedback Tab


The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user drags an answer. You can configure a
different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback When A Correct Match Is Made


You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by using this checkbox.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Select All
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the answers shown in the Possible Answers field.
This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 315


Match Item 2

• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

316 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Match Item 2

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 317


Match Item 2

o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

318 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Order Text
NATIVE ONLY
This object allows you to define an ordered list of words or phrases as the correct response to a
question and test the user's ability to reconstruct the list in proper order. The user answers the
question by dragging the phrases to the correct position.

The lines of text are displayed in a random order when the object is reset. You specify when a
question will be reset on the General tab of the Properties dialog box.

Purpose
The Order Text question allows the user to rearrange words in a field by dragging words to alternate locations within the
same field. This object does not work in DHTML and therefore can be used only for Natively distributed applications.
An Example
The following sections will reveal how to configure an Order Text question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text [Correctly arrange the words below] and the Order Text question object are not one and
the same object. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed the field above
at the top of the page.

Basic Use
The user can drag the words in the field to new positions in the field by clicking and dragging a word.
• Feel free to change the color, font size, etc. of the question object to fit your needs.
• The text to be used in this question is limited to a single paragraph of text, which can wrap to multiple lines if
you like.
• If you attempt to use a carriage return in the text to force a second paragraph, the question will immediately
switch to a mode where instead of moving words you are moving textlines. Essentially it mimics the behavior
of the Drag Text catalog object.
• In Reader mode the words will be displayed to the user in a random order.
• In Author mode the words will be displayed to you in the correct order.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 319


Order Text

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

320 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Order Text

Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the objects on the page are considered to be the possible answers to the
question.

• Text To Be Ordered
This area will list all of words that need to be ordered, shown in the correct order. If you want to control the
formatting of the text in the field (such as font size, color), do so by selecting the Field object contained within
the question object and then use the Properties for Field settings to set the font characteristics. It is not possible
to format the text on a character by character basis.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 321


Order Text

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Text To Be Ordered
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Note that this is the same list shown on the
Answers tab. It is provided in several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so
often.
• Score Weight Of Each Element In Correct Position
This value is computed automatically and cannot be changed. It is essentially the value achieved when you take
100 and divide it by the number of words in your question.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers

322 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Order Text

Immediate Feedback Tab


This question object behaves much different than other question objects. For the Immediate Feedback there really isn't
anything to configure because the question does not really support Immediate Feedback. You do have the opportunity to
Enable Delayed Feedback however, after each move.

• Enable Feedback After Each Move


You can turn On or Off the ability of a question object to trigger Delayed Feedback after each move. For this
question type there is no real concept of Immediate Feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 323


Order Text

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.

324 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Order Text

o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 325


Rating 1, 2, 3
DHTML or NATIVE
This object provides answer choices based on a graduated scale of agreement. You
display a statement for the user to evaluate in a text field that you can drag from the
Catalog.

Purpose
The Rating Questions are actually just Multiple Choice question objects which provide answer choices that allow a user
to click a response. You present the actual question in a field placed near the answer choices.
Details
The functionality of the Rating 1 and Rating 2 questions is identical to the standard Multiple Choice question object, and
the Rating 3 question is identical to the Multiple Choice Field objects.
Each come standard with 5 preconfigured responses, but you can add or remove responses if you like.
Adding More Answers
If 5 answers are not enough for your needs, you can add more by selecting one of the answers and choosing Duplicate
from the Edit menu. This will create a new option.
Removing Answers
If 5 answers are too many, feel free to simply select and delete the answer elements you no longer need.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Rating question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by
using the following examples.
Notice that the question text and the Rating question object are not one and the same object. The Rating question object
only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my question text in it - and placed
the field above the Rating question object.

If using the Rating 3 object, when a user selects one of the answers the fillColor of the field turns Yellow to show the
user that a selection has been made as shown below. In fact the question object will insist that your fields have a fill color
of White. If you attempt to change this fill color it will reset back to white the next time the question is reset. It seems to
have been designed to force the non selected answers to be filled with white and the selected answers filled with yellow.
• There is an undocumented way that Instructor users (sorry Assistant users) can take control of the two color
values, and it requires setting two properties of the question object. Displayed below is the Property Browser
showing the 2 property settings you need to adjust. The ColorChosen and ColorNotChosen. You can change
these to any RGB value you like.

326 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Rating 1, 2, 3

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 327


Rating 1, 2, 3

o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.
Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button
that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your
question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer
shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a
correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.

In the case of a Rating question it would be normal that all possible answer are marked as Correct. By default
this is how the question is configured. You are free to change this however if you feel the need to.
• Add...
This feature does NOT add more answer buttons to your question. If you want more than the standard 4 buttons
then read the Adding More Answer section above.

For a standard Multiple Choice question using the Add... button could be useful, but this feature does not really
seem useful when the question type is being used for ratings. I would not suggest the use of the Add button in
this case but if you want to know what it does anyway, read on.

The purpose of this Add... feature is to be able to introduce a pool of incorrect answers to randomly use as the
possible incorrect responses. For example, lets say you decided to keep all 4 buttons which are initially
configured with a Multiple Choice question object. You want to provide one correct response to the user but
you want the other 3 to be incorrect. Sounds good so far, right? Okay, lets say that you also want those 3
incorrect responses which will be shown to the user to be drawn randomly from a pool of 6 possible incorrect
responses. To do this, you use the Add... feature to add 3 distracter choices. I guess the term distracter is
appropriate as the intention is to distract the user with various incorrect responses. So you will end up with the 3
incorrect responses that were originally there and 3 more that were added as distracters - giving a pool of 6 for

328 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Rating 1, 2, 3

the question to pull from when showing the question. Each time the question is reset, a random set of 3 incorrect
answers would be displayed for this Multiple Choice question object and the one correct one will always be in
the set of displayed answers.

• Edit...
This option allows you to change the text which will be displayed for an answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Randomize Answers
If checked, the answers will be rearranged so that they are presented to the user in a random order. I can't see
any good reason to Randomize the answers to a Rating question but it you need that feature, here it is.
• Multiple Choice/Multiple Correct
In the event your Rating question is supposed to have more than one correct, and you want the user to be able to
select more than one at a time, you will need to turn on this option. I can't see any good reason to have this
feature turned on since in a Rating the goal is to get a single feedback from the user, not multiple, but if you
need that feature, here it is.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 329


Rating 1, 2, 3

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button
that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your
question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer
shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a
correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.

In the case of a Rating question it would be normal that all possible answer are marked as Correct. By default
this is how the question is configured. You are free to change this however if you feel the need to.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
For a Rating question the weighting of the question is set up as follows:
o Strongly Agree = 100% of the score value.
o Agree = 80% of the score value.
o Neutral = 60% of the score value.
o Disagree = 40% of the score value.
o Strongly Disagree = 20% of the score value.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of

330 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Rating 1, 2, 3

percentages, where each correct response is given an equal weight.

This is a setting you may want to turn on so that no matter what they select they will get the full point value for
the question. Of you can leave it off and use the weight that is preconfigured for each possible response.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers. This is a feature that does not makes much sense to use with a Rating
question.
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers. This is a feature that does not makes much sense to use with a Rating
question.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 331


Rating 1, 2, 3

Immediate Feedback Tab


The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. Typically you will have one entry for each button
that is in your question object. It is possible to see more answers listed than the number of buttons in your
question. See the Add... feature to learn more about this feature. The symbol next to each possible answer
shown in this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a
correct symbol and an incorrect symbol.

In the case of a Rating question it would be normal that all possible answer are marked as Correct. By default
this is how the question is configured. You are free to change this however if you feel the need to.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.

332 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Rating 1, 2, 3

o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 333


Rating 1, 2, 3

Delayed Feedback Tab


The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of the maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.

334 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Rating 1, 2, 3

• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 335


Select Text
NATIVE ONLY
The Select Text object allows the user to highlight text to choose an answer. The text cannot
be changed at Reader level.

Purpose
The Select Text question object provides answer choices in the form of text in a field which permits the user to select one
or more responses by highlighting text within the field. This question object does not function in DHTML, so it can only
be used in a Natively distributed book.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Select Text question object using the Extended Properties. Let's
start by using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text and the Select Text question object are not one and the same object. The question object
only deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and
placed the field above the question object.

In this example the terms Hard Drive, Floppy Disk and I/O are the 3 terms which need to be highlighted by the user. As
seen in the next image, as the user highlights their choices the highlight stays in place as they highlight other areas of
text.

336 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Select Text

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 337


Select Text

Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
This feature allows you to specify more text within the field which is considered to be an answer (correct or
incorrect) for this question object.

As you can see by looking at the Possible Answers section which I configured for this sample object, normally
when adding a new answer you would select only one segment of text, as my sample shows. The scoring for my
question depends on the user selecting all 3 segments of text and they get a 1/3 deduction for each one they fail
to highlight.

However this object will permit you to specify that a single answer is comprised of multiple selections - which
would require that the user select all text segments of this specific answer response in order for this answer
element to be considered correct. This is a confusing feature but powerful if and when you finally come across
the need for such flexibility.

338 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Select Text

o The Name of the answer is any text you want to use to describe the selection choice. By default it is the
same as the text selected, but you may want to give it a more meaningful name.
• Edit...
This option allows you to change the text which needs to be selected for a particular answer.

• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked. In my example I could not use this feature
since I needed to permit the user to select 3 segments of text.
• Snap Selection To Word Boundaries
Trying to get a precise selection is difficult if the text is small. Sometimes you end up grabbing an extra space
or perhaps not every character in the word(s) you are trying to select. This option, if checked, will automatically
ensure the extra spaces are ignored and that if you select part of a word that the entire word is selected for you.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 339


Select Text

Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz
catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is unchecked and not worry about this Score Weight option. The question
object will automatically have determined the appropriate weight of each of your answers and assigned the
appropriate percentage. In my example each correct answer is worth 33% of the score.

You are however free to adjust the percentage that each answer is worth.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages where each correct answer you specify will be worth 100% of the answer.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible

340 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Select Text

Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 341


Select Text

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,

342 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Select Text

use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 343


Select Text

the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.
o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

344 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE
The slider object allows the user to drag the position indicator on a slider to answer a
question. To display the current numeric position of the a slider at Reader level, you
can add a slider position object from the Catalog to your page.

Purpose
The Slider question object provides answer choices in the form of a slide lever that allows the user to select an answer by
moving the lever to the appropriate position. The Slider Position catalog object can also be used in conjunction with this
object to show the current numeric position of the slider.
These 4 question objects work the same way, however each looks a bit different. Use the one that best meets your needs.
Configuration Options
The following sections will reveal how to configure a Slider question object using the Extended Properties. Let's start by
using the following example.
Notice that the instructional text and the Slider question object are not one and the same object. The question object only
deals with the Answer elements. In my example I added a field object and placed my instructional text in it - and placed
the field above the question object.

• The position of the selector (slider) can be adjusted by the user simply by click-dragging it.
• The range (currently 0-100) can be adjusted within the Extended Properties of the question object.
• You can configure an answer by using a specific number, or a range value which is considered correct, or
incorrect. In my example, my one configured correct answer is any value between 50 and 70.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 345


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

General Tab
The General tab summarizes your question object settings, as well as provides several settings to control basic behavior.

• Question Name
Although not necessary, you may want to give each question object a unique name.
• Limit Time
Specifies how much time a user has to interact with the question before further interactions are blocked and the
question becomes locked.
• Limit Tries
Specifies how many attempts a user can make to answer the question. Be aware that interacting with one of the
answers does NOT count as an attempt. An attempt is defined as "any time the question is scored". Many users
are confused by this behavior.
• Automatically Reset Question
When a question gets reset, the question will reset itself to an unanswered state and all scoring information
about the question is forgotten. Here are the possible settings for this feature:
o Never
This is the value you will most likely want this set to. The question will not reset when entering or
leaving a page.
o Enter Page
This is also a common setting. It ensures the question resets to an unanswered state when the page is
entered. Warning: If you use this option and a user answers the question, navigates to the next page,
and decides to navigate back to take a look at the previous question again - the state of the question
will be unanswered and their previous score value will have been forgotten forcing them to have to
answer the question again in order to get any points.
o Leave Page
This will reset the question when leaving the page. This is hardly ever used because it always clears
the question score when leaving the page.
o Always
This will reset the question when entering or leaving the page. This is also undesirable for most users
since clearing the scoring information when leaving the page is likely to be an undesirable effect.

346 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

Answers Tab
The Answer tab is where you configure which of the answer elements are considered correct and which are considered
incorrect.

• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol.
• Add...
This feature allows you to specify what number, or range value is considered to be a correct or incorrect answer.

o When...
This shows the value or range statement that you want to use to indicate a correct or incorrect answer.
o < <= = <> >= > AND
These buttons allow you to build your expression in the When... box.
• Edit...
This feature allows you to modify the number, or range value that is considered to be a correct or incorrect
answer.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 347


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

o When...
This shows the value or range statement that you want to use to indicate a correct or incorrect answer.
o < <= = <> >= > AND
These buttons allow you to build your expression in the When... box.
• Delete
This option removes an answer from the list.
• Minimum Value
Your slider can have a range other than 0 - 100. Set the low end of your slider value with this option.
• Maximum Value
Your slider can have a range other than 0 - 100. Set the high end of your slider value with this option.
• Cannot Change Responses
If checked, this will prevent a user from changing their mind. If they attempt to interact with the same answer
element again, ToolBook will inform the user that the item is locked.
• Set Slider Value On Reset
Allows you to set the initial value of the slider when the user first sees the question. You can set it to 0, a
Random position or any other value you like.
Scoring Tab
The Scoring tab allows you to configure how much each answer is worth when determining the total score for the
question.

• Score This Question


When you request for the score for the entire quiz to be calculated (for example when using a Score Quiz

348 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

catalog object or when score data is automatically returned to an LMS), only questions that are have this
specific checkbox checked will be counted in that final score. This gives you the ability to have questions in
your quiz that are not included as part to the scoring data.

Unchecking this option does not mean that you cannot score this question. At any time you can use the Show
Score catalog object to show the user their score for that question. Just remember that the shown score will not
be included in the final score for the entire book.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Score Weight Of Selected Answer
If you are only doing simple questions then this option might seem over complicated. For example if your
question is worth 1 point, then you will likely want the correct responses to be worth 100% of that 1 point, and
the incorrect answers to be worth 0% of that 1 point. In this more simple situation you will likely just want to
ensure the Automatic checkbox is checked and not worry about this Score Weight option.

You are however free to adjust the percentage that each answer is worth.
• Automatic
This feature is directly related to the Score Weight Of Selected Answer option shown above. If you turn on this
option, any custom scoring weights you have assigned will be reset to an automatically generated set of
percentages.
• Lowest Possible Score
Normally the lowest possible score for a question should be 0 but you can set this to any value you wish. It
makes sense however to ensure that the Lowest Possible Score is actually lower than the Highest Possible
Score. ToolBook will permit you to set this higher than the Highest Possible Score, which would only cause you
great confusion, so I don't recommend doing this. Do note however that you can set this value to a negative
number.
• Highest Possible Score
By default a question is worth 1 point, but you can set this to any value you wish.
• For Partially Correct Responses
These settings are to control the scoring behavior when your question is configured to allow for Multiple
Correct answers, and the user did not select all of the correct answers.
o Use The Weight Assigned To Each Possible Answer To Compute An Exact Score
This is the typical setting and ensures that the total score for the question is calculated based on the
weighting you have applied to each answer.
o Report The Lowest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its lowest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
o Report the Highest Score
This feature is not available in a DHTML exported book.
You can choose to have the question report its highest possible score in the event that the user did not
select all of the correct answers
Immediate Feedback Tab
The Immediate Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens when the user selects an answer. You can configure
a different response for each answer you have configured. When you choose one (or more) of the answers in the Possible
Answers list, the bottom half of the editor will update to show you the current settings for that answer.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 349


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

• Enable Feedback At Time Of Response


You can turn off the ability of a question object to give Immediate Feedback by disabling this checkbox. By
default it is enabled.
• Possible Answers
This area will list all of the possible answers to the question. The symbol next to each possible answer shown in
this list defines if the answer is a correct or incorrect answer. Click on the symbol to toggle between a correct
symbol and an incorrect symbol. Note that this is the same list shown on the Answers tab. It is provided in
several places so you don't have to switch back and forth between the tabs so often.
• Select All Correct
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the correct answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Select All Incorrect
This is just a shortcut method of selecting (highlighting) all of the incorrect answers shown in the Possible
Answers field. This way you can configure the setting for several answers all at once instead of doing them one
by one.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to

350 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
By default the value for this is no text at all.

Perhaps you can provide some text encouraging them but not telling them if they are right or wrong, such as
"Are you sure?"
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.
Delayed Feedback Tab
The Delayed Feedback tab allows you to configure what happens after you register an actual attempt on a question. An
attempt is registered when the question is scored. If you want to trigger Delayed Feedback as well as Score the question,
use the Show Delayed catalog object which will do both tasks for you using the one button. The Score Page, and Score
Quiz catalog objects will register an attempt on the question, but will not permit the triggering of Delayed Feedback.
Note that there are a variety of things you can do as feedback, and you can choose to have any one or even all of these
different actions occur as feedback. Doing more than one of these however could be confusing, as there is no guaranteed
order they will happen in. For example if you wanted media to play, text to be displayed and a hyperlink to occur, it is
likely all 3 will happen in rapid succession and the hyperlink will end up navigating to a new page so fast that the media
will not have a chance to start and the text message would not have been read before the page change.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 351


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

• Feedback To Execute On Request When The Responses Are


o All Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when all the correct answers were selected or when
the score for this question is 100% of its maximum score.
o All Incorrect
Select this option to configure what should happen when none of the correct answers were selected or
when the score for this question is 0% of its maximum score.
o Partially Correct
Select this option to configure what should happen when some (but not all) of the correct answers were
selected or when the score for this question is less than 100% of its maximum score but greater than
0%.
• Play Media
o None
Choose this option if you don't want any media file played as feedback.
o Media Clip
Choose this option if you want to play a media clip as feedback.
o Media Player
Choose this option if you want to trigger a media player catalog object on the page as feedback.
• Media Clip
This option is available only if you chose "Media Clip" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to choose
a Clip to play as feedback.
• Media Player
This option is available only if you chose "Media Player" in the Play Media setting above. It allows you to
choose a Media Player catalog object on the page to play as feedback. The little red target icon that appears to
the right of this option will allow you to choose a media player object on your page simply by dragging the icon
image over any media player on your page.
• Feedback Text
Permits you to specify some specific text to be displayed to the user.

o Feedback Text
This is the text you want displayed as feedback. You can use <incorrect> or <correct> to deliver the
standard built in response text if you like.
o Show Only If Media Cannot Play
This is a NON-DHTML feature. In the event you chose to play a Media Clip, and the system is unable
to play the clip, the text will be displayed instead. This is an old setting option which was introduced
primarily to properly handle a situation where a machine had no audio card installed and therefore
could not play an audio clip.
o Automatic
Choosing this option will permit the display of the feedback text in a field named "feedback" if one
exists on your page, or pop it up in a popup display instead.

352 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


Slider 1, 2, 3, 4

o Popup Window
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a popup display.
o Use field or recordfield named "feedback"
Chose this option to force the feedback to be displayed in a feedback field.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent as feedback. The drop down choices for this option have the commonly
used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

• Hyperlink
You can configure a hyperlink to another page to occur as feedback.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 353


Slider Position
DHTML or NATIVE
A slider position object displays the current numeric position of the indicator on a slider at Reader level.

Purpose
This object is not a question object, but rather an accessory for the Slider question object. Since two of the Slider
question objects do not show an actual number range as part of the question, the user does not have a way to judge when
they have positioned the slider correctly.
By dropping one of these on the page, as the user drags the slider, the Slider Position field will display the current
position of the slider.
Feel free to modify the look of this object by changing the Font, Color and Size settings.

354 Catalog Category: Questions (Various)


SCORING AND TRACKING Catalog Category

Use these objects to provide scoring behavior for your application. These objects provide for displaying feedback,
scoring pages, questions, and applications and limiting answer time.
DHTML Mode View:

Native Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 355


Show Delayed
DHTML or NATIVE
Feedback is an automatic response to one or more answers chosen by the user.
When a user clicks the Play Feedback button the delayed feedback for one or more
answers is displayed. Delayed feedback is shown after an action such as clicking a
specific button, not immediately after the answer is entered.

Purpose
This object will Score the specified question objects and show the Delayed Feedback of question objects on a page. It is
identical in behavior to the Show Score button.
Details
When you configure a question object you have the ability to specify specific Delayed Feedback which will be revealed
to the user after the question has been scored. Using this catalog object results in the questions being scored and
feedback being displayed.
When you score a question, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or
alternately a field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the
ones in this category of the Catalog.
Shown below is a standard question object's Extended Properties dialog, showing the Delayed Feedback tab.

General Tab
The Extended Properties of this catalog object will permit you to configure various settings.

356 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Show Delayed

• Name
The default name for this object is Show Delayed Feedback but you are free to change that to any name you
like.
• Object to Score
This option will allow you to choose which question object on the page you want to trigger the Delayed
Feedback for. You also have the option of choosing <all> which will trigger the Delayed Feedback for all
question objects on the page.
Options Tab
The Options tab will permit you to configure various settings.

• Trigger Question Feedback


This is the Master Switch for this object to control if it really triggers the Delayed Feedback or not. If you leave
this unchecked, the Feedback will not trigger, but all the other functionality of this Options tab will still
function.
• Display Question Score As
This object also scores the question, so this option gives you the ability to control if the user gets to have Score
information shown to them. If you enable this option you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose
additional options.

The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded
options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply
show the percent correct to the user.
• Lock Question To Prevent Further Responses
Enable this option if you want the question object to be locked after this Show Delayed button is triggered.
• Reset Question
Enable this option if you want the question object to be reset to an unanswered state after this Show Delayed
button is triggered.
WARNING If you enable this option, an LMS will see no score as a returned value, because the score will
have been cleared by the Reset process. This is a setting you would normally NOT enable,
unless you have a very specific need to do so and you understand the ramifications of doing so.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 357


Show Delayed

• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this
option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

358 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Reset Lesson
DHTML or NATIVE
When a user clicks the Reset button it causes the score for the book to be erased. All questions
are reset to their initial state.

Purpose
If you are in need of a way to reset all questions in a book so that any scoring information currently accumulated is
forgotten, and all questions are reset back to their unanswered state, then this is the catalog object that you will want to
use.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 359


Reset Page
DHTML or NATIVE
The Reset Page button clears any answers made by the user. If the page is scored, the score is
erased when the user clicks this button.

Purpose
If you are in need of a way to reset all questions on a specific page so that any scoring information currently accumulated
for that page is forgotten, and all questions on that page are reset back to their unanswered state, then this is the catalog
object that you will want to use.

360 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Restart Lesson
DHTML or NATIVE
When a student accesses your application through an AICC learning management system such
as Ingenium or the Click2learn e-Learning Network, clicking this button resets all questions to their
original state. After this button is clicked, navigation to the first page of the lesson occurs in the
student's Web browser.

Purpose
If you are in need of a way to reset all questions in a book so that any scoring information currently accumulated is
forgotten, and all questions are reset back to their unanswered state, then this is the catalog object that you will want to
use.
This object is nearly identical to the Reset Lesson button. The one added feature is that the Restart Lesson button will
also take you to page 1 of the book.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 361


Score This Quiz
DHTML or NATIVE
Clicking the Score Quiz button displays the score for all questions in your book. The score
displays in a score field, which can be found in the Scoring and Tracking category.

Purpose
If you need to show the user their score, a tally of all question objects in the book, then this is the object to use. Note that
it is not necessary to show the user their score in order for scoring data to be emailed via logging or returned to an LMS.
Details
When you score a quiz, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or alternately a
field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the ones in this
category of the Catalog.
General Tab
The Score Quiz object has a number of setting which can be configured to control its behavior.

• Object Name
By default the name of this object is Score Quiz, but you can rename it if you like.
Options Tab
The Options Tab has a number of setting which can be configured to further control its behavior. Notice there is no
option to Trigger feedback. This object has no checkbox to trigger delayed feedback. See the Show Delayed catalog
object if you want to both Score and show Delayed Feedback.

• Add Up Score For All Questions And Display As


This is the master switch for the Score Quiz button to control the scoring behavior. If you uncheck this box,
none of the questions will be scored - which would make this button kind of useless.

362 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Score This Quiz

Use the button at the right edge of the field to change the way the score will be displayed.

The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded
options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply
show the percent correct to the user.
• Ignore Pages That Have The Page Property "Skip Navigation" Set To True
The SkipNavigation page property can be used to control which questions get scored. Normally all questions on
all pages get scored, but you can specify that questions on pages marked with the SkipNavigation property set
to true be skipped in the score gathering process.
• Lock All Scored Questions To Prevent Further Responses
If you want to prevent users from attempting to change the answers to the questions in the book after the Score
Quiz functional has been triggered, then this feature should be checked.
• Reset All Questions
If you want all of the questions reset to their unanswered state immediately after the Score Quiz button has been
clicked, then enable this option.
WARNING If you enable this option, the score will be shown to the user, but an LMS will see no score as a
returned value, because the score will have been cleared by the Reset process. This is a setting
you would normally NOT enable, unless you have a very specific need to do so and you
understand the ramifications of doing so.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this
option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 363


Score This Page
DHTML or NATIVE
Clicking the Score Page button displays the score for questions on the current page. The score
displays in a score field, which can be found in the Scoring and Tracking category.

Purpose
If you need to show the user their score for the current page, a tally of all question objects on that page, then this is the
object to use.
Details
When you score a page, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or alternately a
field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the ones in this
category of the Catalog.
General Tab
The Score Quiz object has a number of setting which can be configured to control its behavior.

• Name
By default the name of this object is Score Page, but you can rename it if you like.
• Object To Score
For this object, the value will always be <all>. Kind of makes you wonder why this option is even shown.
Options Tab
The Options Tab has a number of setting which can be configured to further control its behavior.

• Trigger Question Feedback


This feature is disabled for the Score Page object. Use the Show Feedback object instead if your need is to
trigger Delayed Feedback in conjunction with scoring a page.

364 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Score This Page

• Display Question Score As


You have the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option
you can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.

The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded
options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example 3 out of 5). The Percent option will simply
show the percent correct to the user.
• Lock Question To Prevent Further Responses
Enable this option if you want the question object to be locked after this Show Delayed button is triggered.
• Reset Question
Enable this option if you want the question object to be reset to an unanswered state after this Show Delayed
button is triggered.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this
option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 365


Show Score
DHTML or NATIVE
Clicking the Show Score button at Reader level displays the score for answers to questions on the
current page. The score displays in a score field, which can be found in the Scoring and Tracking
category.

Purpose
This object will Score the specified question objects and show the Delayed Feedback of question objects on a page. It is
identical in behavior to the Show Delayed button.
Details
When you score a question, the score information will appear in a popup text box unless a field named Score or
alternately a field named Feedback can be found on the page or background. You can create your own fields or use the
ones in this category of the Catalog.
General Tab
The Extended Properties of this catalog object will permit you to configure various settings.

• Name
The default name for this object is Show Score but you are free to change that to any name you like.
• Object to Score
This option will allow you to choose which question object on the page you want to Score. You also have the
option of choosing <all> which will score all question objects on the page.
Options Tab
The Extended Properties of this catalog object will permit you to configure various settings.

366 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Show Score

• Trigger Question Feedback


This will control if it triggers the Delayed Feedback or not. If you leave this unchecked, the Delayed Feedback
will not trigger.
• Display Question Score As
You the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you
can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.

The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded
options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply
show the percent correct to the user.
• Lock Question To Prevent Further Responses
Enable this option if you want the question object to be locked after this Show Delayed button is triggered.
• Reset Question
Enable this option if you want the question object to be reset to an unanswered state after this Show Delayed
button is triggered.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this
option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 367


Exit (Mark As Complete)
DHTML or NATIVE
When a student accesses your application through an AICC learning management system
such as Ingenium or the click2learn.com e-Learning Marketplace, clicking this button enters
the lesson score in the learning management database and the lesson is marked as
completed. The lesson is exited.

Purpose
If you are using an LMS to track the results of your lesson, then this is one of 3 buttons you can use to tell the LMS that
you are done.
Details
If the content was launched from an LMS:
• This specific button will also tell the LMS that you consider the lesson to be complete.
• After pressing this button, the tracking data will be returned to the LMS and the lesson is immediately exited.
If the content was launched outside of an LMS:
• Pressing this button will simply act as an exit button, closing the content window.

368 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Exit (Suspend Lesson)
DHTML or NATIVE
When a student accesses your application through an AICC learning management system
such as Ingenium or the click2learn e-Learning Marketplace, clicking this button enters the
current score in the learning management database and the lesson is exited.

Purpose
If you are using an LMS to track the results of your lesson, then this is one of 3 buttons you can use to tell the LMS that
you are done.
NOTE This object does not appear in the Native view of the Catalog - but should. It functions just fine in DHTML or
Native.
Details
If the content was launched from an LMS:
• This specific button will also tell the LMS that you consider the lesson to be unfinished, and that the user may
want to complete it at a later time.
• After pressing this button, the tracking data will be returned to the LMS and the lesson is exited.
If the content was launched outside of an LMS:
• Pressing this button will simply act as an exit button, closing the content window.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 369


Exit (Discard Results)
DHTML or NATIVE
When a student accesses your application through an AICC learning management system
such as Ingenium or the click2learn.com e-Learning Marketplace, clicking this button cancels
all question responses for this lesson and the lesson is exited.

Purpose
If you are using an LMS to track the results of your lesson, then this is one of 3 buttons you can use to tell the LMS that
you are terminating the current session.
Details
If the content was launched from an LMS:
• This specific button will also tell the LMS that the current attempt on this lesson never happened, providing a
way of canceling the attempt.
• After pressing this button, the tracking data is discarded and the lesson is exited.
If the content was launched outside of an LMS:
• Pressing this button will simply act as an exit button, closing the content window.

370 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Feedback Field
DHTML or NATIVE
A feedback field displays text that is automatically shown after the user answers a question.
The name of this field must not be changed.

Purpose
The primary purpose for a Feedback field is to provide a place on your page to show Immediate or Delayed feedback
text from Question objects.
Secondarily it will automatically be used to show the Score if you do not have a Score field on your page or background.
Details
A Feedback field is nothing more than a field named Feedback. You can easily use your own field object - just ensure it
is named Feedback.
Below you will see the Immediate Feedback tab of a question object, where you configured feedback text.

When you click the icon at the end of the Feedback Text entry this dialog will appear allowing you to specify how to
handle the display of your feedback text.

Notice you can control whether or not the feedback will always be popped up, or possibly shown in a Feedback field.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 371


Score Field
DHTML or NATIVE
The Score field is not visible at Reader level until the user clicks a Show Score button or one
of the similar buttons in the Scoring section of the Scoring and Tracking category. The name
of this field must not be changed.

Purpose
The primary purpose for a Feedback field is to provide a place on your page to show a score when a score has been
requested to be shown. A variety of catalog objects can trigger the score to be shown, such as the Show Score or Score
Quiz objects.
Secondarily it will automatically be used to show Feedback if you do not have a Feedback field on your page or
background, and feedback is triggered.
Details
A Score field is nothing more than a field named Score. You can easily use your own field object - just ensure it is
named Score.

372 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Graphic Timer 1, 2, 3, 4
DHTML or NATIVE
The timer object displays the number of seconds that remain to
answer a question. The timer is used in conjunction with a
question that has a time limit.

Purpose
If you are using the Limit Time option in a Question object, you can use any of the Graphic Timer objects to give the
user an idea of how much time is remaining before the question will be locked.
Details
Seen below is the General tab of a standard question object, where it is possible to set how much time should be allowed
for the question. You are permitted to specify the total number of seconds allowed for the current question.

General Tab
The Extended Properties for this object will permit you to configure this object.

• Name
The default name of this object is Timer but you can change it using this option.
• Object To Time
Use this option to specify which Question object on the page you would like associated with the Timer.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 373


Graphic Timer 1, 2, 3, 4

Options Tab
Various options are available in the Options tab.

• Trigger Question Feedback


This will control if it triggers the Delayed Feedback for the associated Question object or not. If you leave this
unchecked, the Delayed Feedback will not trigger.
• Display Question Score As
You the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you
can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.

The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded
options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply
show the percent correct to the user.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this
option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

374 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


Digital Timer 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE
The timer object displays the number of seconds that remain to answer a question. The timer is used in
conjunction with a question that has a time limit.

Purpose
If you are using the Limit Time option in a Question object, you can use any of the Digital Timer objects to give the user
an idea of how much time is remaining before the question will be locked.
Details
Seen below is the General tab of a standard question object, where it is possible to set how much time should be allowed
for the question. You are permitted to specify the total number of seconds allowed for the current question.

General Tab
The Extended Properties for this object will permit you to configure this object.

• Name
The default name of this object is Timer but you can change it using this option.
• Object To Time
Use this option to specify which Question object on the page you would like associated with the Timer.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 375


Digital Timer 1, 2

Options Tab
Various options are available in the Options tab.

• Trigger Question Feedback


This will control if it triggers the Delayed Feedback for the associated Question object or not. If you leave this
unchecked, the Delayed Feedback will not trigger.
• Display Question Score As
You the ability to control if the user gets to see Score information shown to them. If you enable this option you
can click the button at the edge of the field to choose additional options.

The Format Options give you control over what the user sees displayed for their score. Both of the Rounded
options will display the score in a format of X out of Y (example: 22 out of 25). The Percent option will simply
show the percent correct to the user.
• Send Message
This is a NON-DHTML option so it only works in Native ToolBook. It permits you to specify which
OpenScript message should be sent after the Show Delayed button is triggered. The drop down choices for this
option have the commonly used Messages you will likely want to choose from.

376 Catalog Category: Scoring and Tracking


TEXT FIELDS Catalog Category

Use text fields to present information on the page. Some of these objects are interactive (such as the Combo Box and List Boxes) and
others are just static text holders.

DHTML Mode View:

Native Mode View:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 377


Auto-Sizing Field
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has been enhanced by some OpenScript code to automatically
adjust the height of the field if needed so that all of the text is visible in the field. It will increase or decrease the height of
the field to tightly fit the text within.
Details
It is important to know when this resizing behavior activates:
• The field will not resize after it has been exported to DHTML. Once exported the size of the field is fixed.
• The field will resize anytime the page is reset, which includes when entering or leaving the page as well as
when toggling from Reader to Author or Author to Reader level.
• At Reader Level if you type in the field, the field will auto-size as you type.
• At Author Level if you attempt to resize the field, it will trigger the auto-size behavior.
Extended Properties

• Name
Allows you to name your object, by default its name is simply Title.
• Auto Border
If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you
can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when
you go back to Reader level.
• Auto Size
This enables or disabled the auto-sizing behavior. Turn off this checkbox to turn off this behavior.

378 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Borderless
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to
display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to none.
Details
This object has no extended behavior, it is simply a field which is already configured to have no border showing.
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles:
• None
• Rectangle
• Scrolling
• Shadowed
• Raised
• Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they
are really just the same object, with a single property changed.
The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 379


Call-out Bubble
DHTML or NATIVE
Use a Call-out Bubble to identify an important feature of a graphic or photograph.

Purpose
The Call-out Bubble was my creation, and was added to ToolBook 8 while I was on the ToolBook development team. I
created it because ToolBook was lacking such an object. It permits you to identify objects on your pages, as is typically
the use of a call-out object. Note that there is another object in the catalog which is also used for call out purposes called
the Call-out Text object.
Details
The Call-out Bubble is just a collection of ToolBook object grouped together with some OpenScript logic making it
function. Since it is just ToolBook objects, feel free to change the colors of the objects (such a the yellow color). You'll
have to select the various objects within the group object in order to control the color.
This bubble can be resized and after doing so it will correctly readjust the size of the bubble to tightly fit all the text in
the box. The trick is to adjust the Width of the bubble and the bubble will automatically adjust the height for you.
The text in the bubble can be raw unformatted text or you can add richly formatted text if you like. Treat the text in the
bubble just like any text field. You can change text color, size, make it bold, etc. Note that it will take several clicks to
get your I-Beam into the field before you can edit the text. As you type new text the bubble will not automatically resize,
however as soon as you click outside of the bubble, it will resize. Optionally you can edit the text in the Extended
Properties.
You can also adjust the position of the TAB by dragging it at Author level, allowing you to point to something very
specific.

General Tab
There are a variety of settings you can adjust in the Extended Properties of this object, controlling the look of the bubble.

380 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Call-out Bubble

• Name
Allows you to set the name of the object. By default the name will be Call-out Bubble.
• General Shape
Your bubble can have rounded corners on it, or rectangular corners. By default it will be rounded.
• Tab Positions
By default the Call-out Bubble comes out of the catalog with a Tab on the bottom edge of the object but you can
choose to have the Tab on other sides of the bubble. You can even turn on multiple tabs at once. Each tab can
be repositioned at Author level simply by dragging the tab to a new position on the edge it is anchored to.
Text Tab
Setting the text of the bubble can be done by directly editing the text on screen, or via this Text tab of the Extended
Properties.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 381


Call-out Text
DHTML or NATIVE
Use a call-out to identify an important feature of a graphic or photograph. A call-out contains
an arrow that connects to a text field.

Purpose
The Call-out Text object permits you to identify objects on your pages, as is typically the use of a call-out object. Note
that there is another object in the catalog which is also used for call out purposes called the Call-out Bubble object.
Details
The Call-out Text object is just a collection of ToolBook object grouped together with some OpenScript logic making it
function. Since it is just ToolBook objects, feel free to change the colors of the objects (such a the line color). You'll
have to select the various objects within the group object in order to control the color.
Trying to adjust the size of the Call-out Text object will result in the object snapping back to its old size. To resize the
object first select the Field object within the Call-out Text object and the resize the field using the selection handles that
appear around the selection.

To move the arrow to another location, simply drag the red target symbol to another location at Author level, and the
arrow will follow.

382 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Card
NATIVE ONLY
You can present information as if it were a series of index cards in this field. Click the forward
or back button to view each card.

Purpose
The Card object can be thought of as a set of index cards. The user will be able to flip through the text on the various
cards.
Details
Unfortunately this is a non-DHTML object so you will only be able to use this within a Natively distributed book.
To use, simply size the object to your desired size and then put all of the text in the text field area of this Card object
while at Author level, and make sure you have two blank lines between the sections of text which you want to appear on
different cards, as shown below.

When viewed at Reader level the Card object will only display the text for the index card the user is currently viewing.
Notice there is a card counter in the lower left corner of the Card object.
The user is free to use the Forward and Previous navigation buttons on the Card object to view the various cards.

The Card object only accepts plain text. If you attempt to enter richly formatted text, the Card object will remove all the
formatting.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 383


Combo Box
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
Use a Combobox when you need to present a list of choices.

Purpose
A Combo Box is very similar to a List Box in that it presents the user with a list of choices. In the case of a Combo Box,
the user makes their choice by clicking on the drop down arrow to reveal the list to select from. When the selection is
made the answer will appear in the main area of the Combo Box to indicate the current selection.
Details
In the Properties for Combo Box there are a variety of setting on the Draw and Behavior tabs.

I won't walk you through the basic behavior of a Combo Box, as that is beyond the scope of this book, however I will
demonstrate how to detect a user selection and act on that selected value, using both OpenScript as well as the Actions
Editor.
Actions Editor
In the Actions Editor you can detect the user choosing an option in a Combo Box by using the On Select event of the
Combo Box. The text of the selection is passed to this event as a parameter named SelectedItemText.

384 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Combo Box

OpenScript
In the OpenScript Editor you can detect the user choosing an option in a Combo Box by using the selectChange
message for the Combo Box. The text of the selection is passed to this event as the first and only parameter.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 385


Date Field
DHTML or NATIVE
A date field displays the current date in a numeric format.

Purpose
The current date can be shown in this field. Unfortunately there are no Extended Properties that you can use to modify
the format of the date. Instructor users would be better served to create their own Date field which formats the date as
needed.
Feel free to change the color and size of the text in the field as well as the font used, so that it looks appropriate for your
needs.

386 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Display Page Number
DHTML or NATIVE
The display page number object shows the number of the current page and the total number
of pages in the book, for example, page 1 of 3.

Purpose
This object will display the current page number and the total page count, so that the user can tell where they are within
the project.
Details
This object will count all pages in your book, but will exclude any page who's Skip Navigation property is set to true.
You can turn on a Page's Skip Navigation property by using the Behavior tab of the Properties for Page dialog as shown
below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 387


Graphic List
DHTML or NATIVE
A graphic list displays lines of text with your selected graphic image at the beginning of each line.

Purpose
This field will display a special image in front of each line of text in your field. By default this image is a red bullet
image. The image will not appear while at Author level.
NOTE This object is not fully functional in the shipping version of 8.5. If you add one to your book the red bullets will
not appear. To fix this all you need to do is use the File menu inside of ToolBook to Open the following
ToolBook file:
• Instructor Users - C:\Program Files\click2learn\Instructor85\Catalog\Text Fields.wbk
• Assistant Users - C:\Program Files\click2learn\Assistant85\Catalog\Text Fields.wbk
Once the file opens, choose SAVE from the File menu, and choose YES to the prompt to do a special catalog
reset. That's it, the problem is now fixed and the red bullets will appear as they should when you add this object
to your book.
General Tab
The Graphic List object has various settings which can be configured using the Extended Properties.

• Name
You can name your field object using this option
• Auto Border
If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you
can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when
you go back to Reader level.
• Auto Size
If this feature is turned on the field will increase or decrease in height as needed to tightly fit the text within.
Resizing typically only occurs when the page is reset.

388 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Graphic List

Options Tab
The image to be displayed can be configured on this tab.

• Image Reference
Use the Choose Button to specify which bitmap resource you want displayed in front of each line.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 389


Inset
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Inset.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles:
• None
• Rectangle
• Scrolling
• Shadowed
• Raised
• Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they
are really just the same object, with a single property changed.
The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.

390 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Marquee
NATIVE ONLY
The marquee object displays text that constantly moves. You can set the movement to
either scroll, slide, or bounce back and forth. The movement of the text is visible at
Reader level, but not at Author level.

Purpose
A scrolling marquee effect can be achieved in ToolBook using this catalog object. It will scroll a line of text in a variety
of ways depending on the settings configured in the Extended Properties.
NOTE This object does not appear in the DHTML view of the catalog, however it does in fact work in DHTML but
only in Internet Explorer. It will not function in Netscape. All you will see in Netscape is static text.
Extended Properties

• Name
By default the name of this object is Marquee, however you can change the object's name here.
• Text
This is the text you wish to have scrolled in the Marquee window.
• Behavior
Scroll: Text will slide into the field and out of the field
Slide: Text will slide into the field and stop at the other end of the field
Alternate: Text will slide into the field and then bounce back and forth off of each edge.
• Direction
Determines the direction that the text enters the field, from the left or right.
• Speed
Specifies the speed to scroll the text in milliseconds.
• Step Size
This setting is meaningless to Native ToolBook and only has meaning to Internet Explorer when exported to
DHTML. It determines how many pixels the text moves per step.
• Loop
This setting is meaningless to Native ToolBook and only has meaning to Internet Explorer when exported to
DHTML. It determines how many times the scrolling is repeated. Use a value of 0 for a never ending scroll.
• Use Alternate Pad Character
A special character is used between the words to facilitate scrolling, however for some obscure fonts this
character may show up as a visible character - which is not desirable. In that event, check this option to use a
alternate character.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 391


Multi-Select List Box
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this text field to
display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
A Multi-Select List Box permits you to offer your user a list of options and allow them to scroll through the list and
choose one or more of the options.
Details
The primary thing you are likely to be interested in about a List Box is the Text of the option(s) chosen by the user. The
process for determining what the user selected is different for the Actions Editor than it is for OpenScript. Below I will
give you examples of how to do each.
For both examples these two objects will be used. One is a Multi-Select List Box and the other is just a button to click on
when all of your choices have been made. The button will get all the coding for the following examples. No code is
placed in the List Box.

OpenScript Editor
Using the OpenScript Editor the List Box will not report the text of the lines selected, but rather will only report the text
line numbers of all selected lines in the SelectedTextlines property. In order to get the Text of those lines you have to use
those text line number references to access the text.
The following example does just that, and then displays the text of the selected items separated by commas.

Actions Editor
Using the Actions Editor is even more confusing than the OpenScript method.
To determine which lines have been selected, you must first access the ItemSelected "array" property of the List Box.
This array contains one element for each line of text. So, for a 4 textline List Box the array will have 4 elements. To read
the ItemSelected "array" property you have to first copy it into an array variable.

392 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Multi-Select List Box

The actual text is stored is a different array property, called ItemText. To read the ItemText "array" property you have to
first copy it into an array variable.
Once both properties are stored in array variables, the For Each loop will be needed to step through each element of the
arrays, and then comes the important part - determining if the text lines were selected or not. The ItemSelected array
contains True - for any element selected, and False - for any element not selected.
The following example demonstrates this mechanism for determining the text of each selected line.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 393


Ordered List
DHTML or NATIVE
An ordered list displays lines of text in an outline format. At Reader level, a numeral or
alphabetical character is automatically placed next to each line of text. The outline
formatting does not appear at Author level. To change the default indentation of any line of
text, you can add a tab to the beginning of a line by pressing Ctrl+Tab.

Purpose
This object will permit you to create an outline of text. Each line of text will show an outline level character when
viewed at Reader level or when Exported to DHTML. When viewed at Author level the outline characters will not show.
General Tab
There are a few configuration options available to you to control this object, as shown in the Extended Properties.

• Name
You can name your field object using this option
• Auto Border
If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you
can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when
you go back to Reader level.
• Auto Size
If this feature is turned on the field will increase or decrease in height as needed to tightly fit the text within.
Resizing typically only occurs when the page is reset.
Options Tab
Here you can control the alphanumeric numbering of the displayed text.

• First Level
Specify if the first level of text will be Roman Numerals, Alphabetical or Numeric.

394 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Password
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
The password field will display an asterisk for each character typed. In the Actions Editor you can
set or get the value of this field by accessing the text property. In OpenScript you can set or get
the value of this field by accessing the ASYM_Text property.

Purpose
The Password field will permit a user to type in text and have only a Masking character appear rather than the text being
typed. This is typically used for Password entry.
DHTML Details
When viewed in the browser, the masking character is controlled by the Operating System and Browser, so for some it
may appear as an asterisk character and for others, perhaps a bullet character.
You can set or get the real (non-masked) value typed into the field simply by accessing the Text property of the field.
Native ToolBook Details
When viewed natively in ToolBook, the masking character will be an Asterisk unless you specify another character be
used. Although not officially documented, an Instructor user can set the masking character to be used by setting the
_passwordChar property of the Password field. To set this property you can open the Command Window from the View
menu, select the field on the page, and then type the following into the Command Window (where you can see I am
specifying that the pound character be used):

You can set or get the real (non-masked) value typed into the field simply by accessing the ASYM_Text property of the
field. If you read the Text property you will simply get masked value, which is likely to not be of any real use to you.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 395


Raised
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Raised.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles:
• None
• Rectangle
• Scrolling
• Shadowed
• Raised
• Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they
are really just the same object, with a single property changed.
The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.

396 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Rectangle
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Rectangle.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles:
• None
• Rectangle
• Scrolling
• Shadowed
• Raised
• Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they
are really just the same object, with a single property changed.
The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 397


Scrolling
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Scrolling.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles:
• None
• Rectangle
• Scrolling
• Shadowed
• Raised
• Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they
are really just the same object, with a single property changed.
The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.

398 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Shadow Text 1, 2
DHTML or NATIVE
This field allows you to display letters with a dropped shadow, using any font available.

Purpose
The two Shadow Text objects are intended to permit you to display text which contains a drop shadow effect.
Details
The only difference between Shadow Text 1 and Shadow Text 2 is that the offset of the shadow if different.
The basic behavior of this object is that as you type text, a shadow will show under the text. This is accomplished by a
2nd field being present at a slight offset position.
You will find that it is very easy, while trying to add more text, to cause this catalog object to become out of sync with
the shadow text, which results is a very messy looking bunch of text. Normally you can fix this little mess by simply
toggling from Author to Reader and then back to Author level again, which causes the object to auto-fix itself.
The color of the shadow is not within your control. It is automatically set to be a complimentary color.
Alternate Idea
Perhaps you want the shadow a different color, a different offset distance, a different offset direction? You can
accomplish this by not using this object at all. Simply use a regular text field and when all of your text is in it, duplicate
the field and layer them on top of each other. Set the color of the one behind to be an appropriate shadow color, and set
the one on top to be any color you like.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 399


Shadowed
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
This catalog object is just a regular field object which has its BorderStyle set to Shadowed.
Details
A field can be configured with the following different BorderStyles:
• None
• Rectangle
• Scrolling
• Shadowed
• Raised
• Inset
This means that although the catalog offers these various border style configured fields as different catalog objects, they
are really just the same object, with a single property changed.
The Properties for Text Field dialog will let you change the BorderStyle of an existing text field as shown below.

400 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Single-Select List Box
INSTRUCTOR CATALOG ONLY
DHTML or NATIVE
If you plan on exporting your application as a series of Web pages (DHTML), use this
text field to display text that looks the same as in ToolBook II.

Purpose
A Single-Select List Box permits you to offer your user a list of options and allow them to scroll through the list and
choose one of the options.
Details
The primary thing you are likely to be interested in about a List Box is the Text of the option chosen by the user. The
process for determining what the user selected is different for the Actions Editor than it is for OpenScript. Below I will
give you examples of how to do each.
Actions Editor
Using the Actions Editor, you access the SelectedItemText property of the List Box in order to determine the text of the
currently selected option.

OpenScript Editor
Using the OpenScript Editor, there is no direct way to access the text of the selected line. The List Box will only report
the text line number which was selected. Using that number you can then ask for that specific textline of the field.

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 401


Time Field
DHTML or NATIVE
A time field displays the current time in a numeric format.

Purpose
The current time can be shown in this field. Unfortunately there are no Extended Properties that you can use to modify
the format of the time. Instructor users would be better served to create their own Time field which formats the time as
needed.
Feel free to change the color and size of the text in the field as well as the font used, so that it looks appropriate for your
needs.

402 Catalog Category: Text Fields


Unordered List
DHTML or NATIVE
In an unordered list, a bullet appears next to each line of text at Reader level. The bullet
formatting is not visible at Author level. To change the default indentation of any line of text,
you can add a tab to the beginning of a line by pressing Ctrl+Tab.

Purpose
This object will permit you to create a list of bulleted text. Each line of text will show a bullet character when viewed at
Reader level or when Exported to DHTML. When viewed at Author level the bullet characters will not show.
Extended Properties
There are a few configuration options available to you to control this object, as shown in the Extended Properties.

• Name
You can name your field object using this option
• Auto Border
If you want a borderless text field, but would like to see the frame of the field while at Author level so that you
can easily adjust it, turn on this option. It will toggle the border on for you at Author level and turns it off when
you go back to Reader level.
• Auto Size
If this feature is turned on the field will increase or decrease in height as needed to tightly fit the text within.
Resizing typically only occurs when the page is reset.
Details
Since every line of text will have a bullet in front of it, it is not possible to make a field look like this (a combination of
some lines with bullets and some without):

In order to accomplish this look you would need to use two normal fields and one Unordered List and arrange them as
shown below:

ToolBook Catalog Objects - Fully Explained 403